2002 Odyssey Online Reference Owner`s Manual Contents

2002 Odyssey Online Reference Owner`s Manual Contents
2002 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................61
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................131
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................231
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................245
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................271
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................329
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................337
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................367
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................381
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................385
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Odyssey. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
Si prefiere este Manual del
Propietario en español,
comuníquese con el concesionario
Honda.
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
38S0X630
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2002 Honda Odyssey was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
i
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INDICATOR LIGHTS (P.63)
GAUGES (P.68)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.249)
HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM (P.132)
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.140)
REAR A/C CONTROL
(P.154)
POWER
DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.82)
GLOVE BOX
(P.90)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.113)
SEAT HEATERS
(P.112)
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
(P.157, 169, 189, 205)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.234)
FUEL FILL
DOOR RELEASE
(P.233)
2
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
(P.117)
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
(P.126)
CENTER TABLE
(P.118)
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.257)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.72/74)
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
(P.77)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.118)
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
(P.92)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.77)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P.116)
CRUISE
CONTROL
(P.222)
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
(P.127)
HORN*
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.187)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.78)
CRUISE
CONTROL
(P.222)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.74/76)
*: To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
3
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supplemental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your vehicle.
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 10
Head Restraints ........................... 10
Door Locks ................................... 10
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ......... 11
Protecting Adults ............................. 12
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 12
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 12
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 13
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 14
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 15
6. Adjust the Steering Wheel ..... 19
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Protecting Children ......................... 22
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 22
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat ............................................ 23
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
Children ................................ 24
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 26
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 26
Additional Safety Precautions .... 27
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats ................................ 28
Protecting Infants ........................ 32
Protecting Small Children .......... 37
Protecting Larger Children ........ 41
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 45
Using LATCH .............................. 47
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 49
Seat Belt System Components ... 49
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 49
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensionners.............................. 51
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 52
Additional Information About Your
Airbags ...................................... 53
SRS Components ......................... 53
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 53
How Your Side Airbags
Work.......................................... 55
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works ........................................ 55
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works ............ 56
Airbag Service .............................. 58
Additional Safety Precautions .... 58
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 59
Safety Labels .................................... 60
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your vehicle is
equipped with airbags, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear your seat belts, and wear them
properly. (See page 15 .)
Restrain All Children
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in a back seat,
not the front seat. A child who is too
small for a seat belt must be properly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page 22 .)
6
Driver and Passenger Safety
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
9 .)
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page 276 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(8)
(4)
(1)
(10)
(3)
(7)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(8) (6)
(
9
)
(7)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Seat Belt Tensioners
(10) Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
any action on your part. These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and always wear your seat belts
properly. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
For your safety, and the safety of
your passengers, your vehicle is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
8
Driver and Passenger Safety
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seats & Seat-Backs
Your vehicle’s seats are designed to
keep you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seatbacks can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
the inside of the vehicle, or by an
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
10
Driver and Passenger Safety
What you should do: Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is moving.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Door Locks
Keeping your doors locked reduces
the chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle during a crash. It also
helps prevent occupants from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out, and outsiders from
unexpectedly opening your doors.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your vehicle’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearing them properly (see page
15 ).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
in a back seat (see page 22 ).
Front seat occupants are sitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page 12 ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
13 ).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page 14 ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
All doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked (see page 12 ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page 241 ).
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page 41 for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
monitor light on the instrument
panel to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the vehicle is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the vehicle during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page 82 for how to lock the
doors.
12
Driver and Passenger Safety
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
move the seat away from the
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the vehicle. Also make
sure your front seat passenger
moves the seat as far to the rear as
possible.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel. Also make sure your front
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
See page 99 for how to adjust the
front seats.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
14
Driver and Passenger Safety
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
See page 100 for how to adjust seatbacks.
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 104 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Using a Lap/Shoulder Belt
(Except the center position of the
third row)
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
16
Driver and Passenger Safety
RELEASE
BUTTON
The front seats and middle row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of a seat belt
anchor, press the release button and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in the
Center Position of the Third Row
METAL PLATE
METAL
HOOK
LATCH PLATE
Unlatch the metal plate of the
shoulder belt from the anchor on the
ceiling and extend the belt by pulling
the metal plate.
Attach the metal hook on the edge of
the shoulder belt to the metal loop
on the latch plate of the lap belt
marked CENTER. Make sure the
shoulder belt is securely attached
and it is not twisted. A twisted belt
can cause serious injuries in a crash.
Insert the latch plate of the lap belt
into the buckle marked CENTER. If
the belt is too short, hold the latch
plate at a right angle and pull on the
plate to extend the belt. Then insert
the latch plate into the buckle, and
tug on the lap and shoulder belts to
make sure the belt is securely
latched.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder
belt again to remove any slack from
the shoulder belt, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull
on the loose end of the lap belt for a
snug but comfortable fit. This lets
your strong pelvic bones take the
force of a crash and reduces the
chance of internal injuries.
18
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a Seat Belt Doesn’t Work Properly
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash. No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt. Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page 49 for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
6.Adjust the Steering Wheel
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page 78 for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
7.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
possibly serious injuries.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your vehicle’s
airbags and other safety features,
you must sit properly and wear your
seat belt properly.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the vehicle,
or by being struck by an inflating
front airbag. Being struck by an
inflating side airbag can result in
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Advice for Pregnant Women
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
20
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. All passengers
must sit in locked, upright seats
and be properly restrained by seat
belts.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door. If a side airbag
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
hands or arms are close to the
airbag covers in the center of the
steering wheel and on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the airbags inflate.
inflates, a cup holder or other hard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to properly
protect young passengers.
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Any child who is too small to wear a
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. (See page
28 .)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.
22
Driver and Passenger Safety
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt. (See page
41 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Additional Precautions to Parents
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
If you are wearing a seat belt, the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your vehicle crashes into a parked
vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child. During a
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
In a back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
24
Driver and Passenger Safety
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 41 for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard and
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children (when carpooling for
example), and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page 41 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 12 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 19 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
15 ).
26
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors. Using this feature will
prevent children from opening the
doors and accidentally falling out
(see page 88 ).
Use the power sliding door main
switch to prevent children from
opening and closing the rear
sliding doors. Using this feature
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
will prevent children from
operating the doors accidentally
(see page 93 ).
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Selecting a Child Seat
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet safety
standards. The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
28
Driver and Passenger Safety
Infants: Children up to about one
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
32 for additional information on
protecting infants.
Small Children: A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing child seat. See page 37 for
additional information on protecting
small children.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
and be properly installed in all
recommended seating positions in
your vehicle.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Placing a Child Seat
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forwardfacing child seats in your vehicle.
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants: Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Small children: Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position and secure a frontfacing child seat with the seat belt
(see page 38 ).
Back Seats
Infants: Recommended positions.
Properly secure a rear-facing child
seat (see page 33 ).
Small children: Recommended
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
30
Driver and Passenger Safety
positions. Properly secure a frontfacing child seat with the seat belt
(see page 38 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats are
designed to be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt. Some child seats
can be secured to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system instead.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
33 , 38 and 47 for instructions on
how to properly secure child seats
in this vehicle.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-toside or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be thrown out of the seat in a
crash and be seriously injured.
Storing a Child Seat
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the vehicle during
a crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Protecting Infants
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Child Seat Type
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
32
Driver and Passenger Safety
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
In this vehicle, a rear-facing child
seat can be placed in any seating
position in a back seat, but not in the
front seat.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat. If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page 12 ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page 13 ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat in another
back seating position, or leave the
affected seat unoccupied. If the
problem cannot be solved, you may
wish to get a smaller rear-facing
child seat.
Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat
with a Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belts in the outer
back seats have a locking
mechanism that must be activated to
secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a rearfacing child seat with this type of
seat belt.
See page 35 for how to secure a rearfacing child seat in the center
position on the third seat with the lap
part of the lap/shoulder belt.
For tips on installing a rear-facing
child seat with either type of seat
belt, see page 36 .
1. With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page 47 .
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
34
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat in
the Center Position of the Third Seat
To install a rear-facing child seat in
the center position of the third seat,
use the lap part of the lap/shoulder
belt. Follow instruction number 1 on
page 33 for routing and latching the
seat belt.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Then pull hard on the loose end of
the belt to remove the any slack (it
may help to put weight on the child
seat while pulling on the belt).
Finally, follow instruction number 5
on page 34 to verify that the child
seat is secured.
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
For proper protection, an infant must
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
36
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Protecting Small Children
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Child Seat Type
A child who can sit up without
support, and who fits within the child
seat maker’s weight and height
limits, should be restrained in a
forward-facing, upright child seat.
Child Seat Placement
In this vehicle, the best place to
install a forward-facing child seat is
in one of the seating positions in a
back seat.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Improperly placing a forwardfacing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
The lap/shoulder belts in the outer
back and front passenger seating
positions have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
38
Driver and Passenger Safety
See page 40 for how to secure a
forward-facing child seat in the
center position on the third seat with
the lap part of the lap/shoulder belt.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page 47 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
may help to put weight on the
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
40
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat in the Center
Position of the Third Seat
To install a forward-facing child seat
in the center position of the third
seat, use the lap part of the lap/
shoulder belt. Follow instruction
number 1 on page 39 for routing and
latching the seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Then pull hard on the loose end of
the belt to remove the any slack (it
may help to put weight on the child
seat while pulling on the belt).
Finally, follow instruction number 5
on page 40 to verify that the child
seat is secured.
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat and
wear a lap/shoulder belt.
If a child is too short for the shoulder
part of the belt to properly fit, we
recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible
and wears the seat belt properly.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, as
shown, the child is large enough to
wear the seat belt.
However, if the belt touches or
crosses the child’s neck, the child
needs to use a booster seat.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm. This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt. Devices intended to improve
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page 15 . Then check
how the belt fits.
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
42
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Using a Booster Seat
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a style that
allows the child to use the lap/
shoulder belt directly, without a
shield, as shown.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages 15 and 41 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
44
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Your vehicle has attachment points
for a tether-style child seat to be
installed on the second or third row
as shown.
Second Seat Installation:
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER ATTACHMENT POINT
Each second row bucket seat has a
tether attachment point on the
underside of the seat cushion.
Lift the head restraint, then route
the tether strap over the seat-back
between the legs of the head
restraint.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Third Seat Installation:
If you want to use either of the
outside attachment points, remove
the tether hardware from the center
attachment point, remove the plug
from the attachment point you are
going to use with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver, then install the tether
hardware.
When installing tether hardware,
make sure the toothed washer is on
the bottom of the bolt. Tighten the
bolt to:
16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m)
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether attachment point and tighten
the strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
There are three attachment points
on the tailgate sill. The tether
hardware is installed on the center
attachment point.
If a torque wrench was not used, see
your Honda dealer as soon as
possible to verify proper installation.
To attach the tether to the child seat,
follow the child seat maker’s
instructions.
If you are not sure how to install the
tether, or you need mounting
hardware, contact your Honda dealer.
46
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
The exact location of each lower
anchorage is marked with a small
circle above the lower anchorage
point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Using LATCH
LOWER
ANCHORS
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the second
row seats. The lower anchors are
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom and are only to be used
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
1. Move the seat belt buckle or seat
belt tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
RIGID TYPE
3. Put the child seat in a second row
vehicle seat and attach the child
seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
FLEXIBLE TYPE
4. Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
5. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point and tighten
the strap according to the child
seat maker’s instructions. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
48
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seven seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Your vehicle has two types of lap/
shoulder belts. The center position
of the third seat has a combination of
a lap belt and a shoulder belt. For
maximum safety, they are designed
to be used together.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
All other seating positions have a
one-piece lap/shoulder belt. This
seat belt goes over your shoulder,
across your chest and across your
hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESS button on the buckle.
Guide the belt across your body so
that it retracts completely. After
exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt
is out of the way and will not get
closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s and the center position
of the third seat have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages 33 and 38 for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page 15 for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Attach the metal hook on the edge of
the shoulder belt to the metal loop
on the latch plate of the lap belt
marked CENTER, then tug on the
shoulder belt to make sure it is
securely attached.
Insert the latch plate of the lap belt
into the buckle marked CENTER,
then tug on the lap belt to make sure
the buckle is latched.
The combination lap belt and
shoulder belt in the center position
of the third seat goes over your
shoulder, across your chest and over
your hips. The shoulder belt has an
emergency locking retractor that
works in combination with the lap
belt.
To fasten the seat belt, unlatch the
metal plate of the shoulder belt from
the anchor on the ceiling and extend
the belt by pulling the metal plate.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESS button on the buckle and
detach the shoulder belt from the lap
belt.
See page 17 for how to lengthen the
lap belt, and how to properly position
the lap and shoulder belts.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page 55 ).
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
52
Driver and Passenger Safety
U.S. Models
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page 333 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
SRS Components
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page 41 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
How Your Front Airbags Work
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page 55 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
U.S. Owners
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
54
Driver and Passenger Safety
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags that came with your
owner’s manual.
Canadian Owners
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Your vehicle is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
The purpose of the SRS
indicator light is to alert
you to a potential problem with your
front airbags. This light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your automatic seat belt tensioners
(page 41 ); or your side airbags or
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (page 45 ).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
and off while you drive.
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cut-off system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
56
Driver and Passenger Safety
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
If does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
the side airbag cutoff system has
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
go out (see page 65 ). If it doesn’t
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your vehicle serviced if:
Your airbags ever inflate. Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
58
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water. If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting a
Honda dealer. Improperly
replacing or covering front seatback covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
See page 240 for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Driver and Passenger Safety
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
HOOD
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
60
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Control Locations ............................ 62
Indicator Lights................................ 63
Gauges .............................................. 68
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ........................................ 71
Headlights .................................... 72
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature ...................................... 73
Daytime Running Lights............. 73
Instrument Panel Brightness ..... 73
Turn Signals ................................. 74
Windshield Wipers ...................... 74
Windshield Washers ................... 76
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ...................................... 76
Hazard Warning........................... 77
Rear Window Defogger .............. 77
Steering Wheel Adjustment ....... 78
Keys and Locks ................................ 79
Keys............................................... 79
Immobilizer System..................... 80
Ignition Switch ............................. 81
Power Door Locks ....................... 82
Remote Transmitter .................... 84
Childproof Door Locks ............... 88
Tailgate ......................................... 88
Glove Box ..................................... 90
Manual Sliding Doors...................... 91
Power Sliding Doors ........................ 92
Seats .................................................. 98
Passenger Seating ....................... 98
Seat Adjustments ......................... 99
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment ............................. 101
Driver’s Seat Power
Adjustments ........................... 102
Driver’s Lumbar Support .......... 103
Armrests ..................................... 104
Head Restraints ......................... 104
Third Seat Access ...................... 105
Moving the Second Row
Bucket Seat ............................ 106
Removing the Bucket Seats
in the Second Row ................. 108
Folding the Third Row
‘‘Magic Seat’’ ......................... . 109
Seat Heaters ................................... 112
Power Windows ............................. 113
Mirrors ............................................ 116
Parking Brake ................................ 117
Digital Clock ................................... 118
Center Table................................... 118
Beverage Holder ............................ 120
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 122
Sun Visor......................................... 123
Vanity Mirror ................................. 123
Rear Compartment ........................ 124
Center Pocket ................................ 124
Coin Holder .................................... 124
Storage Box .................................... 125
Coat Hook ....................................... 125
Accessory Power Sockets............. 126
Interior Lights ................................ 127
Instruments and Controls
61
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Control Locations
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
(P.92)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P.116)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.118)
HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS (P.132)
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.140)
DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.82)
REAR A/C UNIT
CONTROL
(P.154)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.113)
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
(P.157, 169, 189, 205)
SEAT HEATERS
(P.112)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
(P.233)
62
Instruments and Controls
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.234)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.67)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.67)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.65)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.64)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
(P.70)
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
(P.65)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P.67)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.64)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.64)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.64)
*
POWER SLIDING
DOOR INDICATOR
(P.66)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.221)
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
(P.64)
DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR
(P.66)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder Light
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
64
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 356 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page 354 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page 355 .
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This light has two functions:
1. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
2. If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page 358 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system
or automatic seat belt tensioners.
For complete information, see page
85 .
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
56 .
U.S.
Canada
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the ABS. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page 256 .
Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
2. It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
3. If it comes on and stays on when
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
This light also comes on when you
turn the ignition ON (II) and goes off
after the engine starts. See page
257 for more information on the
TCS.
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 80 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Power Sliding Door
Indicator
Door and Brake Lamp Monitor
EX and EX-L models only
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem in the
power sliding door system. With this
light on, move the main switch on
the dashboard to the OFF position,
and have the system checked by
your Honda dealer as soon as
possible. You can still open or close
each sliding door manually. For
more information on the power
sliding doors, see page 92 .
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the tailgate or any door
is not closed tightly. If a brake light
does not work, the BRAKE LAMP
indicator comes on when you push
the brake pedal with the ignition
switch ON (II).
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
All the lights in the monitor display
come on when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). The lights go off
after the engine starts and the
tailgate and all doors are closed
tightly.
66
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page 319 ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the vehicle should flash.
High Beam Indicator
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page 72 for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page 73 ).
Low Fuel Indicator
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
you turn on the headlights or release
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only
Cruise Control Indicator
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page 222 for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page 294 ).
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
TRIP METER
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
U.S. Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
Instruments and Controls
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
ODOMETER
TRIP METER SELECT/RESET BUTTON
Speedometer
68
FUEL GAUGE
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select/
Reset button repeatedly. Each trip
meter works independently, so you
can keep track of two different
distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to near
the upper white mark. If it reaches
the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page 351 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
Please ref uel early, as driving to the
last drop of f uel can result in damage
to the engine and/or three way catalytic
converter.
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Maintenance Required Indicator
1. Turn off the engine.
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages 276 and 278 .
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
70
Instruments and Controls
2. Press and hold the select/reset
button in the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
3. Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
The two levers on the steering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
TRACTION
POWER
CONTROL
SLIDING
SYSTEM
DOOR
(EX and EX-L
models)
WINDSHIELD
SHIFT
WIPERS/WASHERS LEVER
HAZARD
WARNING
LIGHTS
The switches for the hazard warning
lights and rear window defogger are
located to the right of the steering
column.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the TCS, the cruise control,
the power sliding doors and the
power mirrors.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
*
To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
CRUISE
CONTROL
TILT
ADJUSTMENT
HORN*
MIRROR
CONTROL
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Headlights
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘
’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
72
Instruments and Controls
To change between low beams and
high beams, pull the turn signal lever
until you hear a click, then let go.
The blue high beam indicator will
light (see page 67 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
On EX and EX-L models
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, parking
lights, taillights, side marker lights,
license plate lights and instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the
or
position, remove the key, open,
then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
Instrument Panel Brightness
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Instruments and Controls
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Turn Signals
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
Windshield Wipers
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
74
Instruments and Controls
The right lever controls the windshield wipers and washers. The
rotary switch at the end of the lever
has three positions:
INT: intermittent
: low speed
: high speed
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. You can vary
how often the wipers sweep the
windshield by turning the INT TIME
ring next to the rotary switch. The
sweep interval will change slightly
with speed; getting shorter as you
drive faster. In low speed
intermittent and high speed driving,
the wipers run continuously.
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever down. The
wipers run at high speed until you
release the lever. This gives you a
quick way to clear the windshield.
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Windshield Washers
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
The rear window wiper switch is
located next to the windshield wiper
switch.
76
Instruments and Controls
To activate the rear windshield wiper,
turn the switch ‘‘ON’’. If you turn the
switch ‘‘ON’’, the rear windshield
wiper swings twice and then will
sweep the glass approximately every
seven seconds. If you wish to use the
wiper and washer, turn and hold the
switch one position up from ‘‘ON’’.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Hazard Warning
Rear Window Defogger
EX and EX-L models
Push the red button to the left of the
clock to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light above
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
LX model
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
See page 19 for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
78
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Keys
KEY
NUMBER
PLATE
MASTER
KEYS
(BLACK)
VALET KEY
(GRAY)
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the glove box locked when you
leave your vehicle and valet key at a
parking facility.
You should have received a key
number plate with your keys. You
will need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
the plate stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
Your vehicle comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle:
• Ignition
• Doors
• Glove box
• Tailgate
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Remote Transmitter
Some models also come with a
remote transmitter; see page 84 for
an explanation of its operation.
Instruments and Controls
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. A properlycoded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
80
Instruments and Controls
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
vehicle’s key and the ignition
switch while trying to start the
engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
This indicator will also blink several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Ignition Switch
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
• LOCK (0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. The shift lever
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column
when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
ACCESSORY (I) − In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power socket.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the lights on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY to ON.
82
Instruments and Controls
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
80 ).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
Each front door has a master door
lock switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
Push the switch down to lock all
doors and the tailgate, and up to
unlock them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
LOCK TAB
Each front door has a lock tab on the
top. When you push down the lock
tab on the driver’s door, all the doors
and the tailgate lock. Pulling up the
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks
only that door. The lock tab on the
front passenger’s door locks and
unlocks only that door.
To lock the driver’s door, along with
the remaining doors and the tailgate,
push the lock tab down or push the
master switch down, then close the
door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in either front door. To unlock
only the driver’s door from the
outside, turn the key and release it.
If you turn the key and hold it, all
doors and the tailgate will unlock. All
four doors and the tailgate will
unlock when you unlock the
passenger’s door with the key.
Lockout Prevention
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pushing in the lock
tab, the tabs on both front doors pop
out and the lock knobs on the rear
sliding doors slide out. Pushing in
the lock tab on the passenger’s door
only locks that door.
To lock the front passenger’s door
when getting out of the vehicle, push
the lock tab down and close the door.
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Remote Transmitter
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
On EX and EX-L models
You can lock and unlock your vehicle
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
and the tailgate lock. The parking
lights, side marker lights, taillights
and instrument panel lights flash
once.
84
Instruments and Controls
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you push the button a
second time. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights flash twice
when you push the button the first
time.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page 128 ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 10
seconds, then go out. If you relock
the doors and the tailgate with the
remote transmitter before 10
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, all doors
and the tailgate automatically relock.
You cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
if any door or the tailgate is not fully
closed. You cannot lock or unlock
the doors and the tailgate with the
key in the ignition switch.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Opening or Closing the Power Sliding
Doors
Panic Mode
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your vehicle’s horn and
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights will flash for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode, press and hold the PANIC
button for about one second.
LED
DRIVER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
You can open or close each rear
sliding door with the remote
transmitter. The right button
controls the passenger’s side door
and the left button controls the
driver’s side door.
POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
If the power sliding door MAIN
switch on the dashboard is in the
OFF position, you cannot open or
close the sliding doors with the
remote transmitter.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
key is in the ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Replacing the Battery
ROUND
COVER
CUSHION
RING
Open
BATTERY
Close
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate, and the LED will get dim.
Replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR2025
86
Instruments and Controls
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the transmitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same (+ side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Reinstall the O-ring. Align the
▽ mark on the cover with the
◎ mark on the transmitter,
then set the cover in place and turn it
clockwise.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Transmitter Care
Avoid severe shock to the transmitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the transmitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your vehicle’s
system by your Honda dealer. Any
other transmitters you have will also
need to be reprogrammed.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Instruments and Controls
87
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Childproof Door Locks
Lock
On EX and EX-L models
Tailgate
With the childproof door locks on,
automatic operation with the inside
door handle is disabled.
Unlock
LOCK
LEVER
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear sliding doors. Each door has
a lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
knob. To open the door, slide the
lock knob forward and use the
outside door handle.
88
Instruments and Controls
Use your key to lock and unlock the
tailgate.
On the EX and EX-L models, you can
also lock and unlock the tailgate with
the remote transmitter (see page
84 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
See page 241 for information on
cargo loading. Keep the tailgate
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate, and to
prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 59 .
HANDLE
LOCK
TAB
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up the tailgate.
To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate
down, then press down on the back
edge.
The tailgate also has a lock tab on
the inside.
To lock the tailgate without the key
or the remote transmitter, push the
lock tab down and close the tailgate.
Instruments and Controls
89
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Glove Box
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
90
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model)
Your Honda is equipped with dual
sliding doors. Be sure all passengers
are clear of the sliding doors before
closing them.
securely before driving.
Locking the Doors
LOCK KNOB
Opening and Closing the Doors
OUTSIDE
Unlock
Lock
INSIDE
To open a manual sliding door, pull
the inside or outside door handle and
slide the door back. It will latch in
the fully-open position.
To close the door, pull either handle
and slide the door closed. Make sure
the door is closed and latched
Each sliding door has a lock knob
under the inside door handle. Slide
the lock knob forward to unlock, and
backward to lock.
When you drive with children in your
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page 88 ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
A Note About Refueling
Before refueling, make sure the
driver’s side sliding door is fully
closed. When you release the fuel fill
door, the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door may unlock and can
be opened.
If a passenger needs to get out of the
vehicle while you are refueling,
instruct that person to exit on the
passenger’s side, not the driver’s
side.
After you close the fuel fill door, the
sliding door does not automatically
unlock. You must unlock it manually.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model), Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Parking Facing Downhill
When parking facing downhill, make
sure the manual doors are latched in
the fully-open position, then hold the
door open while allowing your
passengers to enter or exit the
vehicle. Do not pull the inside or
outside door handle, or the latch will
release and the door will slam shut.
Power Sliding Doors
Your Honda is equipped with dual
power sliding doors. The doors on
the EX and EX-L models are
electrically powered and can be
operated with the remote transmitter,
the door handles, or the switches on
the dashboard.
Be sure all passengers are clear of
the sliding doors before closing them.
Closing a power sliding door
while any part of a passenger is
in the door’s path can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the doorway before
closing a sliding door.
92
Instruments and Controls
The power sliding doors operate
with the ignition switch in any
position. In addition:
The shift lever must be in Park.
The MAIN switch on the
dashboard must be in the ON
position.
The sliding door you want to
operate must be unlocked.
To open the door with the inside
handle, the childproof door lock
on the door you want to operate
must be unlocked (see page 88 ).
Make sure both sliding doors are
closed before you start driving.
If you shift out of Park while a door
is closing, you will hear a beep until
the power sliding door closes
completely.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
If you shift out of Park while a door
is opening, you will hear a
continuous tone and the door will
stop moving. If you keep driving with
the door open, the tone continues
until you stop and close the door.
When the MAIN switch is off, the
electrical power is off and you will
not be able to use the dashboard
switches or the remote transmitter
to open or close the power sliding
doors.
About the Main Switch
When the MAIN switch is off, you
must operate each sliding door
manually. To open or close a door,
pull the inside or outside door handle
and slide the door. The door will be
difficult to move; this is normal. Do
not use force or try to move the door
rapidly, you could damage the motor.
POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
The MAIN switch on the dashboard
controls electrical power to the
sliding doors. During normal
operation, leave the MAIN switch in
the ON position.
Operating the Doors With the
Dashboard Switches
POWER
SLIDING
DOOR
SWITCHES
The dashboard switches to the left
of the steering column allow you to
open or close each sliding door. The
left switch controls the sliding door
on the left side, and the right switch
controls the sliding door on the right
side.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
93
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
To open a door, make sure the door
is unlocked. Then push and release
the bottom of the switch. If you
forget to unlock the door first, you
will hear three beeps. Unlock the
door and try again.
To close a sliding door, push and
release the top of the appropriate
switch.
To stop the power sliding door’s
movement, push either the top or the
bottom of the appropriate switch.
The door will stop, and you will hear
three beeps.
To start the door moving again, push
the switch again: bottom to open, or
top to close.
94
Instruments and Controls
Operating the Doors With the
Remote Transmitter
LED
DRIVER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
You can open or close each sliding
door with the remote transmitter.
The right button controls the
passenger’s side sliding door, and
the left button controls the driver’s
side sliding door.
To open a sliding door, make sure
the door is unlocked. Then press the
appropriate button for at least two
seconds. If you forget to unlock the
door first, you will hear three beeps.
Unlock the door and try again.
To close a sliding door, press the
appropriate button for at least two
seconds.
To stop the power sliding door’s
movement, push the appropriate
door button on the remote
transmitter. The door will stop, and
you will hear three beeps.
If you push the same button again,
the door will reverse direction.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Operating the Doors With the Door
Handles
Locking the Doors
Sliding Doors and Obstacles
LOCK KNOB
OUTSIDE
Unlock
Lock
Each power sliding door has an autoreverse feature. If a door meets
resistance while closing, it will beep
three times and automatically
reverse direction. However, the door
may not immediately reverse
direction (like some elevator doors),
and the force of a closing door may
cause bruising or discomfort. Always
make sure passengers and any
objects are well away from the power
sliding doors before closing them.
INSIDE
With the sliding door fully-closed or
fully-open, pull the outside or inside
door handle, then release it.
Once the door begins to move, the
door handles cannot be used to stop
the door. If you need to stop the door
for any reason, use the dashboard
switches or the remote transmitter.
Each sliding door has a lock knob
under the inside door handle. Slide
the lock knob forward to unlock, and
backward to lock the doors. You can
also use the lock and unlock buttons
on the remote transmitter.
When you drive with children in your
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page 88 ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the sliding door
or on the door pillar. The autoreverse feature stops working when
the door is about to latch so the
motor can pull the door shut.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
If a person or object is in the way
after the door begins to close, the
door handles cannot be used to stop
the door. To stop the door, use the
dashboard switches or the remote
transmitter.
A Note About Refueling
Before refueling, make sure the
driver’s side sliding door is fully
closed. When you release the fuel fill
door, the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door may unlock and can
be opened.
If a passenger needs to get out of the
vehicle while you are refueling,
instruct that person to exit on the
passenger’s side, not the driver’s
side.
96
Instruments and Controls
After you close the fuel fill door, the
sliding door does not automatically
unlock. You must unlock it manually.
Parking Facing Downhill
When parking facing downhill on a
steep grade, the power sliding doors
may not open or close as they do
normally.
Make sure the MAIN switch is in
the ON position. This allows the
power assist to keep the doors
from slamming shut.
If the MAIN switch is off, the door
can slam shut and possibly injure
someone.
Make sure the power sliding doors
are latched in the fully-open
position, then hold the door open
while allowing your passengers to
enter or exit the vehicle. Do not
pull the inside or outside door
handle, or the latch will release
and the door will close.
How to Reset the Power Sliding
Doors
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead while a
sliding door is open, the power
sliding door system needs to be reset.
After reconnecting the battery:
Close each sliding door completely
by hand; or
Move the MAIN switch on the
dashboard to the ON position.
Push and hold the top of each door
switch until each sliding door
closes completely.
If the power sliding doors are closed,
the system will reset itself
automatically once the battery has
been reconnected.
If the power sliding doors do not
operate properly after resetting,
have your vehicle checked by a
Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Power Sliding Door Indicator
POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR
If the Power Sliding Door indicator
comes on and stays on, it indicates a
problem in the system. Turn the
MAIN switch off to turn off the
indicator. Have the system inspected
by your Honda dealer as soon as
possible.
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Passenger Seating
Convertible Second Row Bucket
Seats
There are bucket seats with
armrests for two front passengers,
bucket seats with armrests for two
passengers in the second row, and a
bench seat for three passengers in
the third row.
For greater cargo capacity, the seats
in the second row can be removed,
and the bench seat in the third row
can be folded into the floor.
98
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
To adjust the bucket seats in the
second row, pull up on the lever on
the front of the seat bottom.
Seat Adjustments
See pages 12 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
The EX and EX-L models have a
power adjustable driver’s seat. All
other models have manual driver’s
seat adjustments.
The front passenger’s seat, and the
seats in the second and third rows
adjust manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
release the lever. Try to move the
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
99
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
To change the seat-back angle of the
bucket seats in the second row, pull
forward on the lever on the outside
of the seat-back.
HANDLE
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seats, pull up on the lever on
the outside of the seat bottom.
100
Instruments and Controls
To adjust the seat-back angle of the
third seat, open the tailgate. Pull on
the handle on the back of the seatback, move the seat-back to the
desired position, and release the
handle. Let the seat-back latch in the
new position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
On LX model
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the front of the seat bottom and turn
the rear dial to raise the rear.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
Instruments and Controls
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments
On EX and EX-L models
See pages 12 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
The two power seat adjustment
switches are on the outside edge of
the seat bottom. The horizontal
switch adjusts the seat bottom in
several directions. The short vertical
switch adjusts the seat-back angle.
You can adjust the seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
102
Instruments and Controls
Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move.
On EX and EX-L models
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
Instruments and Controls
103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Armrests
Head Restraints
See page 14 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
An armrest is located on each of the
front seats and on each side of the
second row seats. Pivot it down to
use it. When you remove the bucket
seats or the bench seat in the second
row, pivot the armrests up out of the
way.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
RELEASE
BUTTON
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways and push
the restraint down.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seatback.
104
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Third Seat Access
To get into or out of the third row
seat, walk between the second row
seats.
When the seat on the passenger’s
side is moved to the center, walk
through the passenger’s side to get
into or out of the third row seat.
Instruments and Controls
105
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Push the back of the seat down over
the floor hooks. Make sure the seat
is securely locked in place.
Moving the Second Row Bucket
Seat
LOCK
RELEASE
LEVER
The second row bucket seat on the
passenger’s side can be moved to the
center to provide access to the third
row seat.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge and
lifting the rear of the seat.
Remove the two floor covers
between the bucket seats in the
second row by carefully prying on
the back edge of the covers with a
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Slide the seat toward the center of
the vehicle.
106
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Make sure the seat is securely
locked in place before driving. A seat
that is not locked in place could fly
around and cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.
Reverse this procedure to move the
seat back to the outside.
Install the floor covers over the outer
floor hooks on the passenger’s side
as shown.
Instruments and Controls
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
To reinstall the seat, hook the front
of the seat to the floor, then push the
back into the locks. Make sure both
the front and the back of the seat are
securely latched before driving.
Removing the Bucket Seats in the
Second Row
LOCK RELEASE LEVER
Both seats can be removed to give
more cargo capacity.
To remove a seat:
Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and fold the seatback forward.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge and
lifting the rear of the seat.
108
Instruments and Controls
Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
Always remove an unlocked seat
from the vehicle before driving. A
seat that is not locked in place could
fly around and cause injury in a
sudden stop or crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Folding the Third Row ‘‘Magic
Seat’’
HANDLE
RELEASE BUTTON
To create more cargo space, you can
fold the third row ‘‘Magic Seat’’ into
the floor recess.
To fold the seat:
1. Remove the head restraints by
pushing the release buttons and
pulling the restraints out.
2. Store the head restraints in the
side cargo net. To install the side
cargo net, hook the four loops on
the net to the tabs on the left side
panel.
3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure the head restraint legs
are inside the cargo net so they do
not damage the seat as you fold it.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Make sure the center shoulder belt
is stored in the holder and the outer
shoulder belts are positioned on each
hook whenever the third seat is
folded.
HANDLE
4. Pull the handle on the back of the
seat cushion while you pull the
entire seat towards you with the
strap. Pivot the seat into the floor
recess.
110
Instruments and Controls
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See Carrying Cargo
on page 241 .
To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Pull the seat out of the recess by
pulling on the handle and the strap.
Pivot the seat forward all the way.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
HANDLE
2. Pull up on the handle on the seatback, and pull the seat-back
upright with the strap. Make sure
the seat is securely locked in place.
3. Reinstall the head restraints.
Instruments and Controls
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Heaters
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
On EX-L model
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them.The
seat heater switch is located on each
front door. Push the front of the
switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm.
112
Instruments and Controls
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the passenger’s seat-back.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
Your vehicle’s front windows are
electrically-powered. Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) to raise or
lower either window.
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
The rear windows are also
electrically-powered (see page 115 ).
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open the front passenger’s
window, push down on the switch
and hold it down until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.
Each front door has a switch that
controls its window. To open the
window, push the switch down and
hold it. Release the switch when you
want the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
The master control panel also contains these extra features:
AUTO − To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down and release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way down. To stop the window
from going all the way down, pull
back on the window switch briefly.
To open the driver’s window only
partially, push the window switch
down lightly and hold it. The window
will stop as soon as you release the
switch.
The AUTO function only works to
lower the driver’s window. To raise
the window, you must pull back on
the window switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position.
114
Instruments and Controls
The MAIN switch controls power to
the front passenger’s window and
the rear power windows. With this
switch off, the front passenger’s
window cannot be raised or lowered
and the rear windows cannot be
opened or closed. The MAIN switch
does not affect the driver’s window.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
The power window system has a keyoff delay function. The windows will
still operate for up to ten minutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either front door cancels
the delay function. You must turn
the ignition switch ON (II) again
before you can operate the windows.
REAR WINDOW SWITCHES
You can open or close each rear
window with the switches on the
driver’s door armrest. The right
switch controls the passenger’s side
rear window and the left switch
controls the driver’s side window. To
open the window, push the switch
down and hold it. Release the switch
when you want the window to stop.
Close the window by pulling back on
the switch and holding it.
Instruments and Controls
115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
TAB
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
116
Instruments and Controls
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the left side of
the dashboard:
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Canadian Models
The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition
switch ON (II), turn on the heaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake light on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running. (see page 64 .)
Instruments and Controls
117
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Digital Clock, Center Table
Digital Clock
On models without navigation system
2. Press and hold the H button until
the hour advances to the desired
time.
Center Table
3. Press and hold the M button until
the numbers advance to the
desired time.
H
M
R
To set the clock:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) to
display the time.
118
Instruments and Controls
You can use R to quickly set the time
to the nearest hour. If the displayed
time is before the half hour, pressing
R sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Center Table
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
The center table can be extended by
pulling on the rear.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
Instruments and Controls
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Beverage Holder
To use the front beverage holder,
pull on the bottom edge. Push the
holder all the way in to close it.
120
Instruments and Controls
Additional beverage holders for the
front seat passengers, and beverage
holders for the passengers in the
second row, are in the center table.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Beverage Holder
TAB
Each second row seat has a
beverage holder on the outside of
the seat cushion. To use the
beverage holder, push on the tab.
The beverage holder will swing open.
To close, pivot it up and push it in
until it latches.
To protect the beverage holder, the
bottom tray is designed to break
away if you try to place a heavy
object on it. If this happens, hold the
edge of the bottom tray and pull it up
until you feel a detent.
Be careful not to damage an open
beverage holder when you get into
or out of the vehicle.
The beverage holders for the third
seat passengers are located in the
armrests on the rear side panels.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Instruments and Controls
121
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
122
Instruments and Controls
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor
EXTENSION
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
Vanity Mirror
SUN VISOR
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window. In this
position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension.
To use a vanity mirror on the back of
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The light beside the mirror comes
on only when the parking lights are
on.
Instruments and Controls
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Compartment, Center Pocket, Coin Holder
Rear Compartment
REAR COMPARTMENT
Center Pocket
124
CENTER
POCKET
LEVER
A storage compartment is located by
the third seat on the driver’s side. To
open the compartment, pull the lever
and lift the lid. To close, lower the lid
and push it down until it latches.
Instruments and Controls
Coin Holder
Open the center pocket by pulling
the handle. Close it with a firm push.
On EX and EX-L models
The light in the pocket comes on
when the instrument panel lights are
on.
COIN
HOLDER
The coin holder is located in the
front beverage holder. To open it,
pull on the bottom edge. Close it
with a firm push.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Storage Box, Coat Hook
Storage Box
Coat Hook
LOCK TAB
STORAGE BOX
On EX and EX-L models
A storage box is located under the
front passenger’s seat. To use it, pull
the handle and slide the box out.
LID
To remove the box for cleaning,
push on the lock tab under the seat
bottom and pull the tray out. Do not
try to force the box. You could
damage it.
To use a coat hook, push on the lid.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
Instruments and Controls
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessory Power Sockets
FRONT
Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets. The front accessory
power socket is located under the
center pocket. The rear socket is
behind the third seat on the driver’s
side.
REAR
To use an accessory power socket,
pull out on the cover.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). The ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
When both sockets are being used,
the combined power rating of both
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
126
Instruments and Controls
The sockets will not power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
When this switch is in the OFF
position:
Light Control Switch
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
ON
DOOR
ACTIVATED
POSITION
None of the lights come on when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off with
the switches next to the lights.
When the switch is in the Door
Activated position:
The individual map lights in the
front come on when any door or
the tailgate is opened. When the
doors and the tailgate are closed,
each light can be turned on and off
with the switch next to the light.
OFF
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The light control switch controls the
interior lights: the individual map
lights by the sun visors, the
individual map lights above the
second and third row passengers,
and the cargo area light. This switch
has three positions: OFF, Door
Activated, and ON.
The cargo area light can be turned
on with the switch in the light.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
on the lens.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
The cargo area light comes on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened if the switch in the light is
in the door activated (center)
position. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, it can be turned
on with the switch in the light.
When the switch is in the ON
position:
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on as long as the
switch remains in the ON position.
The cargo area light comes on and
stays on if the switch in the light is
in the door activated (center)
position.
On EX and EX-L models
The lights go out about six seconds
after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed.
With the light control switch in the
Door Activated position, all the
individual map lights and the cargo
area light (with the switch in the
center position) come on when you
unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page 84 ).
With any door or the tailgate left
open, the lights stay on about three
minutes, then go out.
128
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Individual Map Lights
FRONT
Cargo Area Light
REAR
OFF
ON
Turn on the front individual map
lights by pushing the button next to
each light. Push the button again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page 127 ).
Turn on each rear individual map
light by pushing the lens when the
ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Push the lens again to turn it off.
You can also operate these lights
with the light control switch (see
page 127 ).
The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
This light also works with the light
control switch (see page 127 ).
Instruments and Controls
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Ignition Switch Light
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door, and
stays on several seconds after you
close the door.
130
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling ...................... 132
What Each Control Does .......... 132
How to Use the System............. 135
To Turn Everything Off ........... 139
Climate Control System ................ 140
(EX model and EX-L model without
Navigation System)
Fully-automatic Operation ........ 142
Semi-automatic Operation ........ 144
(EX-L model with Navigation
System)
Fully-automatic Operation ........ 148
Semi-automatic Operation ........ 149
Sunlight Sensor/
Temperature Sensor ............. 153
Rear A/C Unit ............................ 154
Audio System (LX) ........................ 157
AM/FM/Cassette Stereo
Audio System ......................... 157
Operating the Radio .................. 158
Adjusting the Sound .................. 161
Audio System Lighting ............. 162
Operating the Cassette
Player ...................................... 162
Tape Search Functions ............. 162
Operating the Optional CD
Player/Changer ..................... 165
CD Changer Error
Indications .............................. 168
Audio System (EX, EX-L) ............. 169
AM/FM/CD Audio System ..... 169
Operating the Radio .................. 170
Adjusting the Sound .................. 174
Audio System Lighting ............. 175
Radio Frequencies ..................... 175
Radio Reception ......................... 175
Operating the CD Player .......... 177
Operating the CD Changer ...... 179
Protecting Compact Discs ........ 180
CD Player Error Indications..... 181
CD Changer Error
Indications .............................. 182
Operating the Cassette
Player ...................................... 183
Tape Search Functions ............. 184
Caring for the Cassette
Player ...................................... 186
Remote Audio Controls ............ 187
Theft Protection ........................ 188
Audio System (Optional on
U.S. EX-L model) ................... 189
AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio
System..................................... 189
Operating the Radio .................. 191
Adjusting the Sound .................. 195
Audio System Lighting ............. 196
Operating the Cassette
Player ...................................... 197
Operating the CD Player .......... 200
Operating the CD Changer ...... 202
CD Player Error Indications..... 203
CD Changer Error
Indications .............................. 204
Rear Entertainment System ......... 205
Security System ............................. 221
Cruise Control ................................ 222
HomeLink Universal
Tranceiver .................................. 225
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
On LX model
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for best
visibility.
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
REAR A/C
CONTROL DIAL
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air conditioning ON and OFF. The indicator
above the button lights when the
A/C is on.
132
Comfort and Convenience Features
AIR CONDITIONING
FAN CONTROL
BUTTON
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
REAR WINDOW
BUTTON
DEFOGGER BUTTON
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recirculation mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 77 ).
Rear A/C Control Dial
With this dial, you can adjust the
rear A/C unit heating, cooling, and
air flow (see page 154 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
Mode Buttons
Use the MODE buttons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. In this case you cannot turn it
off.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
Comfort and Convenience Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
Vent Controls
CENTER VENTS
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the dashboard vents
by moving the tab in the center of
each vent up-and-down and side-toside.
134
Comfort and Convenience Features
CORNER VENT
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials next to them.
REAR CEILING VENT
There are four vents in the ceiling
(see page 156 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
How to Use the System
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
1. Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
and Fresh Air mode.
2. Select
3. Set the fan to the desired speed.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light above the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm from
being parked in the sun, you can cool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the temperature control dial is turned all the
way to the left.
3. Set the fan to maximum speed.
4. Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
136
Comfort and Convenience Features
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
69 ) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
To Heat
To warm the interior:
1. Start the engine.
and Fresh Air mode.
2. Select
3. Set the fan to the desired speed.
4. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
1. Switch the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and Fresh Air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Switch the fan on.
.
2. Select
When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
4. Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather:
1. Start the engine.
.
2. Select
When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
3. Switch the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
138
Comfort and Convenience Features
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the corner vents with the dial
beside each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
To Turn Everything Off
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
You should shut the system
completely off only for the first few
minutes of driving in cold weather,
until the engine coolant warms up
enough to operate the heater. Keep
the fan on at all other times so stale
air does not build up in the interior.
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
On EX and EX-L models
The automatic climate control
system in your Honda picks the
proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to
maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
CENTER VENTS
CORNER VENT
Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unit
that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the heating, cooling, and air
flow (see page 154 ).
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each corner
of the dashboard is adjustable.
Move the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
The corner vents can be opened and
closed with the dials next to them.
140
Comfort and Convenience Features
There are four vents in the ceiling
(see page 156 ).
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
REAR CEILING VENT
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
EX model and EX-L model without
Navigation System
Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button and set the
fan control dial to AUTO, then set
the desired temperature by turning
the temperature control dial. You will
see FULL AUTO in the system’s
display. The light above the
button also shows you which
mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is
selected.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
142
Comfort and Convenience Features
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FULL AUTO
DISPLAY
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
FAN CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FULL AUTO
DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL DIAL
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL to go out.
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
144
Comfort and Convenience Features
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recirculation mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Fan Control Dial
You can manually select the fan
speed by turning the fan control dial.
When you turn the dial clockwise,
the fan is taken out of automatic
mode and starts to run at its lowest
speed. Turning the dial fully
clockwise increases the fan’s speed,
which increases air flow.
MODE BUTTON
FAN CONTROL DIAL
Rear A/C Control Dial
With this dial, you can adjust the
rear A/C unit heating, cooling, and
air flow (see page 154 ).
REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL
Mode Button
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes. Each time you
press the MODE button, the display
shows the mode selected. Press the
button four times to see all the
modes.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
146
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The
button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select
, the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. If
the fan control dial is in AUTO, the
fan speed increases automatically. If
it is not in AUTO, manually increase
the fan speed or set the dial to
AUTO. You can increase air flow to
the windshield by closing the side
vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 77 ).
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
EX-L model with Navigation System
Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. Then set
the desired temperature by pressing
either side of the TEMP button: ▲
to raise the temperature above the
displayed value, or ▼ to lower the
temperature.
TEMPERATURE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
temperature to the set value.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
148
Comfort and Convenience Features
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
vehicle has been driven for a short
time and the heater starts to develop
warm air.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain automatically controlled. Some of these
functions appear in the Navigation
System display. Press the A/C
button next to the display to show
these functions.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Buttons
Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on
and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C
OFF activated in the display.
TEMPERATURE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTONS
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set it below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recirculation mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
MODE ICONS
Fan Control Icons
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing any of the fan
control icons.
FAN CONTROL ICONS
Mode Icons
Use the MODE icons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents and the side vents in all modes.
150
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The
button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select
, the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase air flow to the windshield by
closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
DEFROST BUTTON
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 77 ).
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
152
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Rear A/C Unit
Your vehicle has two controls for the
rear A/C unit. The rear A/C control
dial is located on the climate control
panel, and the rear A/C passenger
control panel is on the ceiling behind
the driver’s seat.
You can adjust the heating, cooling,
and air flow of the rear A/C unit with
these control dials. The rear
passengers can also adjust the
direction and the amount of air flow
with the rear ceiling vents.
REAR CEILING VENT
154
Comfort and Convenience Features
REAR A/C PASSENGER
CONTROL PANEL
REAR A/C
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Rear A/C Control Dial
When this dial is in the RR position,
the rear A/C passenger control
panel is enabled. A second row
passenger can then adjust the fan
speed and air flow.
Rear A/C Passenger Control Panel
Turning the dial clockwise from the
RR position turns off the rear A/C
passenger control panel, and
increases the rear fan speed. The air
flows from the rear floor vents.
REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL
When this dial is in the OFF position,
no air flows to the rear vents, and the
rear control panel is turned off.
Turning the dial counterclockwise
from the OFF position increases the
rear fan speed and air flow. The air
flows from the rear ceiling vents.
FAN SPEED
CONTROL DIAL
HEATING/COOLING/
AIR FLOW
CONTROL DIAL
When the rear A/C control dial on
the front panel is in the RR position,
the passenger in the second row can
use the rear A/C passenger control
panel to adjust the fan speed and air
flow.
The fan speed control dial changes
the speed of the rear fan; turn it
clockwise to increase fan speed and
air flow.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The heating/cooling/air flow control
dial selects the temperature and
level of the air flow.
When the dial is in the
position, heated air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When the dial is in the
position cooled air flows
from the rear ceiling vents. Cooled
air can be selected when the A/C
switch on the front control panel is
turned on.
Rear Ceiling Vents
TAB
LEVER
The direction and quantity of air flow
from each rear ceiling vent is
adjustable.
To adjust the direction of the air
coming from a rear ceiling vent,
move the tab in the center of each
vent back-and-forth, and rotate the
vent with the tab. The lever next to
each vent can be opened and closed
to regulate the amount of air flow.
156
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AM/FM/Cassette Stereo Audio
System
On LX model
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
B* noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Radio
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob.
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
158
Comfort and Convenience Features
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the upper part ( ▲ ) to tune
to a higher frequency, or the lower
part ( ▼ ) to tune to a lower
frequency. The frequency numbers
will start to change rapidly. Release
the bar when the display reaches the
desired frequency. To change the
frequency in small increments, press
and release the TUNE bar quickly.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, push
the SEEK switch up or down, then
release it. Depending on which way
you push the switch, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. SCN shows in the
display. The system will scan up the
band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds a strong signal,
it will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
AM/FM SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK SWITCH
SCN INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Preset − You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
AM/FM BUTTON
To store a frequency:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
2. Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
3. Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
160
Comfort and Convenience Features
SEEK SWITCH
PRESET
BUTTONS
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader − These two
controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the sideto-side strength, while the Fader
control adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
BASS/FADER
CONTROL
TREBLE/BALANCE
CONTROL
To adjust the fader, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,
and adjust the front-to-back sound to
your liking. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Treble/Bass − Use these controls
to adjust the tone to your liking.
To adjust the balance, push on the
TREBLE/BALANCE control knob
to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly
farther, and adjust the side-to-side
sound to your liking. Push the knob
back in when you are done so you
cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
To adjust the Treble level, push on
the TREBLE/BALANCE control
knob to get it to pop out. Without
pulling it out farther, turn the knob
to adjust the treble level. Push the
knob back in when you are done so
you cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
To adjust the Bass level, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Without pulling it out
farther, turn the knob to adjust the
bass level. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
For information, See page 175 .
Comfort and Convenience Features
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 73 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Operating the Cassette Player
Turn the audio system ON. Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates
the side you inserted facing upward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
162
Comfort and Convenience Features
Dolby B noise reduction turns on
when you insert a cassette. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby B
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the
button.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
Tape Search Functions
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
FF/REW − Fast Forward and Rewind move the tape rapidly. To rewind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
SKIP − The Skip Function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To find the beginning of
the song or passage currently
playing, push the SKIP switch down.
You will see REW flashing in the
display as the tape rewinds. To find
the beginning of the next song, push
the SKIP switch up. You will see FF
flashing in the display as the tape
fast forwards. When the system
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, it goes back to PLAY mode.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
REPEAT − The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
EJECT BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
CASSETTE SLOT
REW BUTTON
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
FF BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
EJECT BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
CASSETTE SLOT
REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
Caring for Cassettes
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page 186 for information on
cassette care and protection.
PLAY BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
164
Comfort and Convenience Features
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Optional CD
Player/Changer
A Compact Disc changer is available
from your dealer. It holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate the CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
AM/FM BUTTON
RANDOM INDICATOR
TAPE/CD BUTTON
REPEAT INDICATOR
Your dealer also has an accessory indash single CD player available that
is operated by the radio controls. To
operate this unit, use the instructions
(except for those relating to multiple
discs) in this section.
Using the instructions that came
with the changer, load the desired
CDs in the magazine, and load the
magazine in the changer. Play only
standard round discs. Odd-shaped
CDs may jam in the drive or cause
other problems.
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
RPT BUTTON
SKIP SWITCH
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To operate the CD changer or player,
the ignition must be in ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) and the audio system
must be on.
Press the CD button until ‘‘CD’’
appears in the display. The system
will start to play the first track of the
first disc in the magazine. Play only
standard round discs.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the magazine is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
166
Comfort and Convenience Features
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1−6). If
you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
You can use the SKIP switch to
select tracks within a disc. If you
push and release the SKIP switch,
the system will move to the
beginning of a track. Push the switch
up to move to the beginning of the
next track, and push the switch
down to move to the beginning of
the current track.
If you push and hold the SKIP switch,
you will hear a beep and the system
will continue to move across tracks.
Release the switch when you think it
has reached the desired place on the
disc.
REPEAT − When you activate the
Repeat feature by pressing the RPT
button, the system continuously
replays the current track. You will
see RPT in the display as a reminder.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
RANDOM PLAY − This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on a
CD in random order, rather than in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and hold the RPT button until you
see RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play tracks
randomly on the current disc. When
all tracks on that disc have been
played, the next disc is loaded and
played randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing RPT again.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
If the system is in Repeat mode, you
must turn it off by pressing RPT
before you can select Random Play.
Then press the button again until
you see RDM displayed.
RANDOM INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
TAPE/CD BUTTON
REPEAT INDICATOR
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button or insert a
cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode, play will continue at the
same disc and track.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same disc and track
when you turn it back on.
PRESET BUTTONS
Protecting Compact Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
180 .
SKIP SWITCH
RPT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Comfort and Convenience Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Changer Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
Disc-changer
malfunction.
CD magazine ejection
impossible.
Disc is in changer
mechanism.
High temperature.
Misconnection or
disconnection of CD
changer.
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
No CD in magazine.
168
Comfort and Convenience Features
Solution
If the code disappears within a few seconds,
unit is OK.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button. If the magazine does not eject, consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button, and insert an
empty magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
See your Honda dealer.
Insert CD magazine.
Insert a CD in the magazine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Audio System
On EX and EX-L models
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page 188 ).
Comfort and Convenience Features
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Radio
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
170
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the
side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and the
side to tune to a lower
frequency. The frequency numbers
will start to change rapidly. Release
the bar when the display reaches the
desired frequency. To change the
frequency in small increments, press
and release the TUNE bar quickly.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
the SEEK bar on either the
or
side, then release it.
Depending on which side you press,
the system scans upward or downward from the current frequency. It
stops when it finds a station with a
strong signal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Preset − You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
AM/FM BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
To store a frequency:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK BAR
TUNE BAR
2. Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
3. Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
172
Comfort and Convenience Features
PRESET BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
TUNE BAR
AUTO SELECT INDICATOR
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
A. SEL BUTTON
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset previously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Comfort and Convenience Features
173
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader − These two
controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the sideto-side strength, while the Fader
control adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
To adjust the fader, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,
and adjust the front-to-back sound to
your liking. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Treble/Bass − Use these controls
to adjust the tone to your liking.
To adjust the balance, push on the
TREBLE/BALANCE control knob
to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly
farther, and adjust the side-to-side
sound to your liking. Push the knob
back in when you are done so you
cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
To adjust the Treble level, push on
the TREBLE/BALANCE control
knob to get it to pop out. Without
pulling it out farther, turn the knob
to adjust the treble level. Push the
knob back in when you are done so
you cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
174
Comfort and Convenience Features
BASS/FADER
CONTROL
TREBLE/BALANCE
CONTROL
To adjust the Bass level, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Without pulling it out
farther, turn the knob to adjust the
bass level. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 73 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
Radio Reception
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
176
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the CD Player
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
AM/FM BUTTON
CD SLOT
TUNE BAR
EJECT BUTTON
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. In all
cases, play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CD BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
A.SEL/RDM BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the beginning and play that disc again.
You can use the TUNE and SEEK/
SKIP bars while a disc is playing to
select passages and change tracks.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the TUNE bar. Press the
side to move forward. You will
see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
178
Comfort and Convenience Features
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the
side to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
REPEAT − To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
RANDOM PLAY − This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
If the system is in Repeat mode, you
must turn it off by pressing the RPT
button before selecting Random Play.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
A Compact Disc changer is available
for your vehicle. It holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Oddshaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1−6). If
you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (indash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the indash player operating instructions.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the disc in the in-dash
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD
changer and begin play where it left
off. If there are no CDs in the
changer, the display will flash. You
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.
Comfort and Convenience Features
179
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Protecting Compact Discs
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
180
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Player Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
System Error
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Communication Error
LSI Error
Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your Honda dealer.
Comfort and Convenience Features
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Changer Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
System Error
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Communication Error
LSI Error
High temperature.
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
No CD in the CD
magazine.
182
Comfort and Convenience Features
Solution
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
See your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Insert CD.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
The cassette system features Dolby
B* noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
PLAY
BUTTON
NR
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
PROG
BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates
the side you inserted facing upward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise
reduction, turn it off by pressing the
NR button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button on the cassette player.
184
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the PLAY button.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD button. To change
back to the cassette player, push the
CD button.
Tape Search Functions
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
FF/REW − Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. Press
and release the
side of the
TUNE bar to fast forward the tape,
or the
side to rewind. You will
see FF or REW flashing in the
display. To stop fast forward or
rewind, press either side of the
TUNE bar or the PLAY button. If the
system reaches the end of the tape
while in fast forward or rewind, it
automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
SKIP − The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the
side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
REPEAT − The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Comfort and Convenience Features
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Caring for the Cassette Player
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contamination builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
186
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you see the error indication
‘‘
’’ (LX model)/‘‘
’’
(EX and EX-L models)/‘‘
’’
(optional on EX-L model) on the
display, press the EJECT button and
remove the cassette from the unit.
Make sure the tape is not damaged.
If the cassette will not eject or the
error indication stays on after the
cassette ejects, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
On LX model
If a problem develops in the connection between the cassette player and
the radio, you will see ‘‘
’’ in
the display. Take the vehicle to your
Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Remote Audio Controls
AUDIO/CH
BUTTON
The top and bottom buttons adjust
the volume up (▲) or down (▼).
Press the proper button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The AUDIO/CH button has three
functions, depending on whether you
are listening to the radio, or playing a
cassette or CD.
On EX and EX-L models
Two controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the AUDIO/CH button to change
stations. Each time you press this
button, the system advances to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. You will see the
number of the selected Preset button
in the display. To change bands,
press the AM/FM button on the
audio system’s front panel.
If you are playing a cassette, use the
AUDIO/CH button to advance to the
next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’
blinking in the display when you
press the AUDIO/CH button. The
system fast forwards until it senses a
silent period, then goes back to
PLAY.
If you are playing a CD, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the
AUDIO/CH button. You will see the
disc and track number in the display.
Comfort and Convenience Features
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Theft Protection
On EX and EX-L models
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, the user
must enter a specific five-digit code
in the Preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
to store this card in a safe place at
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
188
Comfort and Convenience Features
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘
’’ in the
frequency display the next time you
turn on the system. Use the Preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code. If
it is entered correctly, the radio will
start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio system
Optional on U.S. EX-L model
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby*
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO2) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page 188 ).
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
This system also has a rear
entertainment system that allows the
rear passengers to listen through
wireless headhones to different
programming than the front seat
occupants. A built-in DVD player
allows the rear passengers to watch
DVDs or video CDs. To operate this
part of the system, refer to Rear
Entertainment System on page 205 .
The front control panel has two
displays. The left display shows the
information for the front part of the
system.
When the rear system is on, the
right display shows the information
for the rear part of the system.
190
Comfort and Convenience Features
FRONT SYSTEM DISPLAY
REAR SYSTEM DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Radio
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
SCAN
INDICATOR
STEREO
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BAR
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
the SEEK bar on either the − or
+ side, then release it.
Depending on which side you press,
the system scans upward or downward from the current frequency. It
stops when it finds a station with a
strong signal.
192
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
To store a frequency:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
Preset − You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it. The
preset frequencies will be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
2. Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
3. Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
A.SEL
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
A.SEL
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset previously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
SCAN
BUTTON
194
Comfort and Convenience Features
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
from BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
ADJUSTMENT LEVEL
Treble/Bass − Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the selected mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting.
Balance/Fader − These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
TUNE KNOB
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ C ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
196
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see
page 73 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
For information, see page 175 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Cassette Player
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates
the side you inserted facing upward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
(
) button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The
indicator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the
button.
DOLBY
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
CASSETTE
SLOT
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PROG BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
CASSETTE SLOT
CD/CDG BUTTON
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
198
Comfort and Convenience Features
TAPE
EJECT
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
REW
BUTTON
FF BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
To switch to the radio, CD player or
CD changer, press the AM/FM or
CD/CHG button. To change back to
the cassette player, press the TAPE
button.
SEEK BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Tape Search Functions
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
FF/REW − Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the
button. You will see REW in
the display. To fast forward the tape,
push the
button. You will see
FF displayed. Press the
,
or PLAY/PROG button to take
the system out of rewind or fast
forward. When the system reaches
the end of the tape, it reverses
direction and begins to play.
SKIP − The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the − side of the SKIP
bar. You will see REW flashing in the
display as the tape rewinds. To skip
to the beginning of the next song,
push the + side of the SKIP bar.
You will see FF flashing in the
display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the
beginning of a song or passage, it
goes back to PLAY.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either side of the
SKIP bar ( − or + ).
REPEAT − The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the
or
button, or
either side of the SKIP bar, also
turns off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Caring for the Cassette Player
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page 186 for information on
cassette care and protection.
Comfort and Convenience Features
199
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the CD Player
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD SLOT
CD EJECT
BUTTON
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Oddshaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
200
Comfort and Convenience Features
RPT
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SKIP BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the beginning and play that disc again.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press
the + side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
− side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Each time you press and release the
+ side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the − side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
REPEAT − To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
RANDOM PLAY − This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
Comfort and Convenience Features
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
A Compact Disc changer is available
for your vehicle. It holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Oddshaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
202
Comfort and Convenience Features
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC−) or Preset 6
(DISC+) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off . If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (Radio or Cassette Player).
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (indash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the indash player operating instructions.
Protecting Compact Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
180 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Player Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error or a
DVD has been loaded in
the CD player
High temperature
Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Comfort and Convenience Features
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Changer Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High temperature
No CD magazinein the
CD changer
204
Comfort and Convenience Features
Solution
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Optional on EX-L model
Your Honda is equipped with a Rear
Entertainment System that includes
a DVD player for the enjoyment of
the rear passengers. With this
system, the rear passengers can
enjoy a different entertainment
source (radio, cassette player, CD
player or DVD player) than the front
seat occupants.
REAR PWR
BUTTON
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the Rear Entertainment
System.
Turn on the rear system by pressing
the REAR PWR button. The rear
entertainment system can then be
operated from the front control panel,
the rear control panel on the ceiling,
or with the remote control. The right
display then shows the information
for the rear system.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
When the rear system is turned on, it
selects the entertainment source it
was last set to. If that source has
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.
You must select another source.
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR CTRL
SELECTOR KNOB
When you turn on the rear system,
the rear speakers are automatically
turned off. You will see the Rear
Speakers Off icon in the right display.
The sound for the rear system is
sent to the wireless headphones. If
you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until they come on.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to. For
example, if you are listening to the
radio, and your rear passengers are
listening to a CD through the
headphones, the rear speakers will
206
Comfort and Convenience Features
REAR CONTROLS
OFF ICON
play the radio when you turn them
on. To have the vehicle speakers
play the CD, change the front source
from AM/FM to CD.
Pressing the RR CTRL selector knob
turns off the rear controls. Your
REAR SPEAKERS
OFF ICON
passengers are not able to operate
the rear system with the control
panel in the ceiling or with the
remote control. You will see the Rear
Controls Off icon in the right display.
Press the selector knob again to turn
the rear controls back on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Rear Video Operation
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs. It features
Dolby* noise reduction. The video
screen is designed for use by the
rear seat passengers only.
The driver should not try to view the
screen while driving.
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
REAR CONTROL
PANEL
DVD SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
BUTTON
OVERHEAD
SCREEN
Open the overhead screen by
pushing on the button. The screen
will swing down part-way. Pivot the
screen the rest of the way. If you
pivot the screen too far forward, past
the detent, the display will turn off.
Pivot the screen back to the detent
to turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
The DVD player is located under the
front control panel. Insert the disc
into the DVD slot. Push the disc in
halfway, the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
Follow the instructions on the
following pages to operate the DVD
player from the front control panel,
the rear control panel or with the
remote control.
Comfort and Convenience Features
207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, you
must first turn the RR CTRL knob
clockwise to enable the panel. The
red RR LED will come on to show
that the control panel is now enabled.
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR CTRL SELECTOR
KNOB
RR LED
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the knob
counterclockwise. The system will
automatically change back to the
front system several seconds after
you stop pressing the buttons.
RPT
BUTTON
208
Comfort and Convenience Features
RDM
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
PAUSE
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
PLAY Button
SEEK/SKIP Bar
RPT Button
Some DVDs start playing
automatically after the disc is loaded
completely. If a disc does not start
playing, press the PLAY button. If
the system is in PAUSE mode, press
the PLAY button to cancel the
PAUSE mode.
You can move rapidly within a track
or a chapter by pressing the SEEK/
SKIP bar. Press and hold the + side
to move forward, You will see ‘‘CUE’’
in the display. Press and hold the −
side to move backward, You will see
‘‘REV’’ in the display. Release the
button when the system reaches the
point you want.
Press the RPT button to
continuously replay the current track.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press the button again to turn it off.
RPT works only with CDs.
PAUSE Button
Press the PAUSE button to pause
the disc. Press the button again or
press the PLAY button to return to
PLAY. PAUSE works only with
DVDs.
Each time you press and release the
+ side of the SEEK/SKIP button,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the −
side of the button to skip backward
to the beginning of the current track
or chapter. If you press the − side of
the button while the beginning of a
track or chapter is playing, the
system skips to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
RDM Button
To play the tracks within a CD in
random order, press the RDM
button. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the button again to
cancel RDM. RDM works only with
CDs.
Comfort and Convenience Features
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player from
the Rear Control Panel
You can control some DVD functions
from the rear control panel in the
ceiling Make sure the rear control
operation has not been disabled with
the RR CTRL knob on the front
panel.
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
MENU
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
REAR CONTROLS
OFF BUTTON
CH/DISK
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
Source Selection Buttons
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
shown in the display.
PLAY/PAUSE/PROG Button
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to skip back to the
210
Comfort and Convenience Features
CH/DISK
BUTTON
PLAY/PAUSE/PROG
BUTTON
beginning of the current chapter.
If you press the
button while the
beginning of a chapter is playing, the
system skips to the beginning of the
previous chapter.
ENT BUTTON
MENU/ENT Buttons
To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
,
, ▲ , and ▼ buttons to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player with
the Remote Control
You can control all of the DVD
functions with the remote control.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the RR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
When using the remote control,
point it at the rear control panel in
the ceiling.
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
REW/FWD BUTTONS
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS
STOP BUTTON
PAUSE BUTTON
Source Selection Buttons
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
shown in the display.
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SUBTITLE BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
ANGLE BUTTON
RETURN (T/C) BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
PLAY/PROG Button
Press this button to start playing a
DVD.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
PAUSE Button
MENU Button
TITLE Button
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play.
Some DVDs have menus that allow
you to select a dubbed language,
subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.
The menu contents will vary from
DVD to DVD.
Some DVDs have a title menu. The
contents of the menu vary from
DVD to DVD.
STOP Button
Press this button to stop playing a
DVD.
SKIP Buttons
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to skip back to the
beginning of the current chapter.
FWD/REW Buttons
Press the
button to move
forward rapidly within a chapter. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
button to move backward
rapidly within a chapter. You will see
REV in the display. Release the
button when the system reaches the
point you want.
212
Comfort and Convenience Features
Press the MENU button to display
the DVD’s main menu. Use the
,
,
, and
buttons to select
the desired menu option. Then press
ENT to enter your selection.
If the menu has more than one page,
use the
and
buttons to
change pages.
Press the TITLE button to display
the title menu window. Move your
selection by pressing the
,
,
and
buttons. Enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. If the menu has more than
one page, use the
and
buttons to change pages. Press
the TITLE button again to close the
window.
SUBTITLE Button
You can also use the numbered
buttons to enter the number of a
menu option. You do not have to
press ENT, the option will be
selected when you complete the
number. Make sure you enter two
digits. If the option number is less
than 10, enter a ‘‘0’’ first.
Many DVDs are recorded with
subtitles, sometimes in multiple
languages. To select subtitles, press
the SUBTITLE button. Continue to
press and release the SUBTITLE
button to scan through the available
languages.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
AUDIO Button
ANGLE Button
Many DVDs are recorded, or
dubbed, in more than one language.
To select a different language than
the one being heard, press the
AUDIO button. Continue to press
and release the AUDIO button to
hear all the available languages.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. By pressing the Angle
button, you can select a different
viewpoint.
DISP Button
In the MENU selection mode,
pressing the RETURN button for
less than two seconds changes the
MENU display to the previous page.
Pressing the RETURN button for
more than two seconds while a DVD
is playing brings the system into the
TITLE enter mode. When you enter
your selection, the DVD player will
start playing from the selected title.
RETURN (T/C) Button
To change the color, contrast, aspect
ratio, and brightness of the video
screen, press the DISP button. The
current setting of one will be
displayed on the screen each time
you press the button. Use the
and
buttons to change the
setting as desired. The display will
disappear from the screen several
seconds after you stop adjusting the
setting.
Comfort and Convenience Features
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs
Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Compact Discs’’ on page
180 .
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the area designation of ‘‘1’’
or ‘‘ALL’’.
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs bearing the
above marks on their packages or
jackets.
DVD-ROMs cannot be played in this
system.
214
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the DVD
player, find the cause in the chart to
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High temperature
Low Vehicle Battery
Voltage
Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the
DVD Player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the DVD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Run the engine to recharge the battery.
Comfort and Convenience Features
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Playing a CD With the Rear
Entertainment System
An audio CD can be played in either
the main CD player in the front panel,
in the DVD/CD player below the
front panel, or in the optional CD
changer. This allows the front and
rear passengers to listen to different
CDs.
Playing a CD With the Front Panel
Select the rear system by turning the
RR CTRL knob clockwise. If the CD
is loaded in the main CD player, or
CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the
CD is loaded in the lower player,
select DVD/AUX.
If the CD is loaded in the main CD
player or CD changer, refer to pages
200 and 202 for operating
instructions. If the CD is loaded in
the DVD/AUX player, refer to page
208 .
216
Comfort and Convenience Features
Playing a CD With the Rear Control
Panel
If the CD is loaded in the main CD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of current track. Press it
again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
If the CD changer is selected, use
the ▲ and ▼ buttons to change
discs.
Playing a CD With the Remote
Control
If the CD is loaded in the main CD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold either the FWD or REW
buttons. When you press FWD, you
will see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. When
you press REW, you will see ‘‘REW’’
in the display. Release the button
when the system reaches the desired
point.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Playing the Radio With the Rear
Entertainment System
Select the radio with the AM/FM
button on the front panel, the rear
control panel, or the remote control.
From the front panel, after selecting
the rear system with the RR CTRL
knob, use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN functions or the Preset
buttons to select a station.
From the rear control panel in the
ceiling, use the ▲ and
▼ buttons to select the stations
that are set into the Preset buttons.
Pressing the
or
button will
cause the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.
To change Preset stations with the
remote control, press the
or
button To search for strong
stations, press the
or
button.
Playing a Cassette With the Rear
Entertainment System
After loading the cassette, select the
cassette player with the TAPE
button on the front panel, the rear
control panel, or the remote control.
To operate the cassette player from
the front panel, refer to page 197 .
Make sure you have selected the
rear system with the RR CTRL knob
first.
On the remote control, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Press the FWD or
REW button to fast forward or
rewind the tape. Press either of
those buttons or the PROG/PLAY
button to return to playing the tape.
To skip to the beginning of the next
song or passage, press the
button. You will see FF
flashing in the display. To skip to the
beginning of the current song or
passage, press the
button. You
will see REV flashing in the display.
On the rear control panel, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Use the
and
buttons to skip. Press the
button to skip forward to the
beginning of the next song or
passage. You will see FF flashing in
the display. Press the
button to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current song or passage. You will
see REV flashing in the display.
Comfort and Convenience Features
217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Replacing Remote Control
Batteries
BATTERIES
COVER
To replace the batteries in the
remote control, press down on the
▲ symbol on the back, then slide the
cover backward. Remove the old
batteries. Make sure the polarity of
new batteries is correct when you
install them. Install the cover by
sliding it forward until it locks. The
remote control uses two
AA batteries.
218
Comfort and Convenience Features
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Storing the Remote Control
HOLDER
When you are not using the remote
control, store it in the holder. Place
the remote control in the holder with
the front end out. Put the holder into
the front seat-back pocket and hook
it on the edge of the seatback pocket
as shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. To turn on the headphones,
press the red button on the earpiece.
Adjust the volume level with the dial
at the bottom of the same earpiece.
Wireless Headphones
Replacing Batteries
COVER
To adjust the comfort of the
headphones, slide the earpieces up
or down the headband.
ON/OFF BUTTON
VOLUME
DIAL
Some state and local goverment
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
For greater battery life, turn off the
headphones when they are not in use
by pressing the red button again.
They will turn off automatically if
they do not receive an audio signal
from the system for several minutes.
Store the headphones in the pockets
in the back of the front seats when
they are not in use.
BATTERY
The batteries are under the domed
covers on the back of each earpiece.
To remove a cover, press down on it
with your thumb, slide it backward
(away from the headband), then lift
it up. Remove the battery and note
its polarity. Install the new battery in
the earpiece with the polarity the
same. Set the cover in place, then
slide it up until it locks. Each
headphone uses two AAA batteries.
Comfort and Convenience Features
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
Auxiliary Input Jacks
ARMREST
LEVER
VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are under the
third seat armrest on the driver’s
side. To access these connectors,
open the cover by pulling up on the
lever.
220
Comfort and Convenience Features
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Security System
With the system set, you can still
open the tailgate with the master key
or the remote transmitter without
triggering the alarm. The alarm will
sound if the tailgate lock is forced, or
the tailgate is opened with the
tailgate release handle.
On EX and EX-L models
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the alarm stops. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock either
front door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system sets automatically fifteen seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and tailgate.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors from the outside with
the key, or remote transmitter. The
security system light next to the low
oil pressure indicator starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM
LIGHT
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), or
the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door Lamp Monitor on
the instrument panel (see page 66 ),
to see if the doors and tailgate are
fully closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Comfort and Convenience Features
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the vehicle under
those conditions.
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH
RESUME/accel
CANCEL
SET/decel
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
222
Comfort and Convenience Features
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Press and release the SET/decel
button on the steering wheel. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
The cruise control may not hold the
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The vehicle will
accelerate. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will speed
up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The vehicle will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument panel will go out. When the
vehicle slows to the desired speed,
press the SET/decel button. The
vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
will cause the cruise control to
cancel.
CANCEL
BUTTON
You can cancel the cruise control in
any of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
224
Comfort and Convenience Features
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel will go out and the vehicle will
begin to slow down. You can use the
accelerator pedal in the normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h) and then
press and release the RESUME/
accel button. The CRUISE
CONTROL light comes on. The
vehicle will accelerate to the same
cruising speed as before.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to Using the
Cruise Control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate
remotely-controlled devices around
your home, such as garage doors,
lighting, or home security systems. It
can replace up to three remote
transmitters.
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
While training or using HomeLink,
make sure you have a clear view of
the garage door or gate, and that no
one will be injured by its movement.
The HomeLink transceiver stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
HomeLink if your car’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. Garage door
openers manufactured before that
date do not have a safety feature that
causes them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
Comfort and Convenience Features
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training HomeLink
Before you can use HomeLink to
operate devices around your home, it
must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train HomeLink to open
and close the garage door:
Before you begin − If you just took
delivery of your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red light in HomeLink.
226
Comfort and Convenience Features
3. Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
4. Press the button on the remote
control and the button on
HomeLink at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Canadian Owners:
The remote control you are training
from may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
HomeLink to learn the code. Release
and press the button on the remote
control every two seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
5. The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
6. When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink
transceiver button you just trained.
If the red light blinks for two
seconds, then stays on, you have a
rolling code garage door opener.
You may be able to verify this with
the manufacturer’s documentation.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System.’’
8. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotelycontrolled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure
trains HomeLink to the proper
garage door opener code. The
following procedure synchronizes
HomeLink to the garage door opener
so they send and receive the correct
codes.
7. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
transceiver button by pushing it. It
should operate the garage door.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
It may be helpful to have someone
assist you with this procedure.
TRAINING BUTTON
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
5. Press and release the HomeLink
button again. This should turn off
the training light on the garage
door opener unit. (Some systems
may require you to press and
release the button up to three
times.)
2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
3. Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
228
Comfort and Convenience Features
4. Press and release the button on
HomeLink. (The same button you
trained with the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Retraining a Button
To train an already programmed
transmitter button to operate a new
device:
1. Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
2. Press and hold the HomeLink
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
3. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, place the
remote control for the device 2 to
5 inches from HomeLink.
4. Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
5. Release both buttons. HomeLink
should now be trained to operate
the device.
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
You should erase all three codes
before selling the vehicle.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Comfort and Convenience Features
229
Main Menu
230
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Honda,
you should know what gasoline to
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
Break-in Period .............................. 232
Gasoline .......................................... 232
Service Station Procedures .......... 233
Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 233
Opening the Hood ..................... 234
Oil Check ................................ 236
Engine Coolant Check .......... 237
Fuel Economy ................................ 238
Vehicle Condition ...................... 238
Driving Habits ............................ 238
Accessories and Modifications .... 239
Carrying Cargo .............................. 241
Before Driving
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking. New brakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
interval shown in the maintenance
schedule.
232
Before Driving
You should follow these same recommendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are replaced.
We also recommend that you should
not tow a trailer during the first 500
miles (800 km).
Gasoline
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gasoline, Service Station Procedures
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Filling the Fuel Tank
Pull
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
1. Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
Before refueling, make sure the rear
sliding door on the driver’s side is
closed.
FUEL FILL CAP
CONTINUED
Before Driving
233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
pump keeps clicking off even though
the tank is not full, there may be a
problem with this system. Consult
your dealer.
234
Before Driving
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page 356 ).
Opening the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
1. Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page 300 ).
SUPPORT ROD
LATCH
2. Standing in front of the vehicle,
put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
up on this handle until it releases
the hood. Lift the hood.
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on
the driver’s side of the hood.
CONTINUED
Before Driving
235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
Oil Check
DIPSTICK
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a
few minutes after turning the engine
off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
236
Before Driving
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
4. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Oil on page 285 .
RESERVE TANK
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 289 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner Maintenance
Checks on page 283 for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
Before Driving
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuel Economy
The condition of your vehicle and
your driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Vehicle Condition
Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance schedule.
This will keep it in top operating
condition.
An important part of that maintenance is the Owner Maintenance
Checks (see page 283 ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
238
Before Driving
Driving Habits
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and accelerate smoothly.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Turn off the A/C to
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Accessories
Your dealer has genuine Honda
accessories that allow you to
personalize your vehicle. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your vehicle, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 240 for
additional information.)
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
operation of your vehicle, or even
cause the airbags to deploy.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 360 ).
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicle’s electrical system
capacity, they can interfere with the
Before Driving
239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifications
Do not remove any original
equipment or modify your vehicle in
any way that would alter its design or
operation. This could make your
vehicle unsafe and illegal to drive.
In addition, any modifications that
decrease ground clearance increase
the chance of undercarriage parts
striking a curb, speed bump, or other
raised object, which could cause
your airbags to deploy.
For example, do not make any
modifications that would change the
ride height of your vehicle, or install
wheels and tires with a different
overall diameter.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
the operation of the vehicle’s antilock brakes and other systems.
Additional Safety Precautions
240
Before Driving
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door. If a side airbag
inflates, a cup holder or other hard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Do not place any objects over the
outside edge of a front seat-back.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
REAR COMPARTMENT
FRONT DOOR POCKET
CENTER POCKET
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the front doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The cargo area is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the seats
in the second row can be removed
and the bench seat in the third row
can be folded into the floor to allow
you to carry more cargo or longer
items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
operation and make it unsafe. Before
carrying any type of cargo, be sure to
read the following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKET
STORAGE BOX*
*
EX and EX-L models only
CARGO AREA
GLOVE BOX
Before Driving
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,267 lbs (575 kg).
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
When you load luggage, the total
weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The load
for the front and rear axles also must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and
GAWR are printed on the tire
information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb (see page 370 ).
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Add up the weight of all occupants.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
Subtract the total from 1,267 lbs
(575 kg).
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
242
Before Driving
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Top Carrier
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 59 .
If you can carry any items on a
roof top carrier, be sure the total
weight of the rack and the items
on it does not exceed 150 lb (68
kg).
If you use an accessory roof top
carrier, the roof top carrier weight
limit may be lower. Refer to the
information that came with your roof
top carrier.
Side Cargo Net
The side cargo net can be installed
on the driver’s side panel in the
cargo area to secure small items. To
install the side cargo net, hook each
loop on the four corners of the net to
the tabs on the left side panel. When
you fold down the third seat, store
the head restraints in the side cargo
net.
Before Driving
243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net
Cargo Hooks
On EX and EX-L models
There are cargo hooks under the
front passenger’s armrest and on the
back of the third row seat. They are
designed to hold light items. Heavy
objects may damage the hooks.
You can use the cargo net to secure
items in the cargo area, and store
small items between the two halves
of the net. To install the cargo net,
hook the loops on the four corners of
the net to the tabs at both sides of
the tailgate sill.
244
Before Driving
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Traction Control System,
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
Preparing to Drive ......................... 246
Starting the Engine........................ 247
Starting in Cold Weather
at High Altitude ..................... 247
Automatic Transmission............... 248
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 248
Shift Lever Positions ................. 249
Engine Speed Limiter ............... 251
Shift Lock Release ..................... 251
Parking ............................................ 253
The Braking System...................... 254
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 254
Brake System Design................ 255
Anti-lock Brakes ........................ 255
Important Safety
Reminders .......................... 256
ABS Indicator ......................... 256
Traction Control System............... 257
TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 258
TCS Indicator ............................. 259
Driving in Bad Weather ................ 260
Towing a Trailer ............................ 262
Driving
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood and tailgate
are fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
246
Driving
5. Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page 99 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 116 ).
7. Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page 78 ).
8. Make sure the doors and tailgate
are securely closed and locked.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 15 ).
10.Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
11. Start the engine (see page 247 ).
12. Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page 63 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
6. If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
2. Push the accelerator pedal halfway to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1. Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Driving
247
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Your Honda’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
for better fuel economy. You may
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid acceleration and have the transmission
checked by an authorized Honda
dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator
if there is a problem in the automatic
transmission control system.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
248
Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Positions
To shift from:
P to R
SHIFT LEVER
The shift lever has seven positions.
It must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D3, 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on
the brake pedal, and keep your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
R to P
N to R
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
D to D3
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the lever.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
251 .
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
Driving
249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park position if you need to leave the vehicle
for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift
lever from Neutral to another gear.
Reverse (R) − To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Pull the shift lever
towards you before shifting into
Reverse from Neutral.
250
Driving
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
Drive (D3) −This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D3 when
towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. D3 can also keep
the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one
or two gears, depending on your
speed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Second (2) − To shift to Second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Second gives you more power when
climbing, and increased engine
braking when going down steep hills.
Use second gear when starting out
on a slippery surface or in deep snow.
It will help reduce wheelspin.
When driving down hill with a trailer,
use the Second position.
First (1) − To shift from Second to
First, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. With the
lever in this position, the transmission locks in First gear. By upshifting and downshifting through 1, 2,
D3 and D, you can operate this
transmission much like a manual
transmission without a clutch pedal.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
shift lock release slot cover on the
steering column. Remove the
cover by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver (not included in the
tool kit).
CONTINUED
Driving
251
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT COVER
4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to Neutral.
252
Driving
6. Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then install a
new cover. Depress the brake
pedal and restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your Honda
dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. The indicator
on the instrument panel shows that
the parking brake is not fully
released; it does not indicate that the
parking brake is firmly set. Make
sure the parking brake is set firmly
or your vehicle may roll if it is
parked on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission − making it
easier to move the shift lever out of
Park when you want to drive away.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels toward the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Parking Tips
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors with the key or the
remote transmitter.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Driving
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Your Honda is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
254
Driving
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Brake Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. They make a
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Brake System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Front
Anti-lock Brakes
Your vehicle has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
You should never pump the
brake pedal, this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle
continues straight ahead even
though you turn the steering wheel.
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up
and helps you retain steering control
by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal, it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before you
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
CONTINUED
Driving
255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle, it only helps with steering
control during braking. You should
always maintain a safe following
distance from other vehicles.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
256
Driving
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
ABS Indicator
ABS INDICATOR*
*
U.S. indicator shown
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page 65 ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without antilock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System, Traction Control System
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 358 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The TCS indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator if there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake
system.
Traction Control System
Your Honda is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. The TCS assists
only in low-speed, low-traction
conditions; up to approximately 18
mph (30 km/h).
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS indicator
flashes when this occurs.
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM INDICATOR
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your vehicle’s whole
braking system and cannot prevent
skidding if you enter a corner too
fast. It is still your responsibility to
drive at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
Driving
257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System
When starting out or driving at low
speeds on a loose or slippery road
surface, you may notice that the
vehicle does not respond to the
accelerator in the same way it does
at other times. This is a sign TCS is
activating. You will see the TCS
indicator light flash.
You should still install winter tires on
your vehicle during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with vehicle. Exercise the
same caution in winter driving as you
would if your vehicle was not
equipped with TCS.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page 338 ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
258
Driving
If the brakes overheat while TCS is
activating, the TCS indicator will
stop flashing and stay on temporarily.
This indicates that TCS has turned
off. After the brakes have cooled
down (usually for about 10 minutes),
TCS will turn back on and the
indicator will turn off.
TCS ON/OFF Switch
TCS ON/OFF SWITCH
This switch is under the side vent. It
lets you turn the Traction Control
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS indicator
light is flashing.
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
TCS Indicator
The TCS indicator comes on or
flashes under the following conditions:
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off TCS.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem with TCS, the indicator
will come on and stay on.
If the brakes overheat, the
indicator will come on.
If the TCS indicator comes on and
stays on for more than 10 minutes
while driving, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the system inspected
by your Honda dealer. You can still
drive the vehicle without TCS.
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see ABS Indicator on page
256 ).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
Driving
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Bad Weather
Rain, fog, and snow conditions require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your vehicle wellmaintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these conditions.
260
Driving
Driving Technique − Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your vehicle longer
to react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard application of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Visibility − Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the
windshield washer reservoir full of
the proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defroster and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
pages 137 and 147/152 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Bad Weather
Traction − Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slippery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be very cautious when passing, or
being passed by other vehicles. The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
a skid.
Driving
261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Your Odyssey has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as for carrying
passengers and their cargo.
To safely tow a trailer, you must
observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
Load Limits
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum weight you can tow
depends on several factors. See
page 263 for limits for your towing
situation. Towing a load that is too
heavy can seriously affect your
vehicle’s handling and
performance.
262
Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Number of Occupants*
2
3
4
5
6
7
Equipped with transmission cooler
and power steering fluid cooler
3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)
3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)
3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)
3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)
2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)
650 lbs (295 kg)**
*: Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant.
**: Weight limited to avoid exceeding rear GAWR (see page 264 ).
Tongue Load: The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
CONTINUED
Driving
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo
and the tongue load is 5,665 lbs
(2,570 kg).
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weights
on the vehicle axles are 2,833 lbs
(1,285 kg) on the front axle, and
2,845 lbs (1,290 kg) on the rear
axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer
is 8,265 lbs (3,750 kg) with the
proper hitch and fluid coolers.
(See page 265 for information
about fluid coolers.)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
264
Driving
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody,
using the six threaded holes
provided. A hitch and the required
fluid coolers designed especially for
your Odyssey can be obtained from
your Honda dealer.
Weight Distributing Hitch
Sway Control
If the total trailer weight is more
than 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you must
also use a weight distributing hitch.
This device transfers weight from
the vehicle’s rear wheels to the front
wheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.
Carefully follow the hitch maker’s
instructions for proper installation
and adjustment.
If the total trailer weight exceeds
2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should install
a sway control device to minimize
swaying that can occur in crosswinds
and in normal and emergency
driving maneuvers. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Safety Chain
Always use a safety chain. Make
sure that it is secured to both the
trailer and hitch, and that it crosses
under the tongue so it can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chain drag on the ground.
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
You must also have a transmission
fluid cooler and a power steering
fluid cooler installed. These coolers
are available only from your Honda
dealer.
CONTINUED
Driving
265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
266
Driving
Trailer Lights
GROUND
(BLACK)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
BACK-UP LIGHT
(GREEN/BLACK)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/BLUE)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/BLACK)
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
the drawing above for the wiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your Honda dealer.
To use the trailer lighting connector,
you will need a wiring harness and
converter. This comes with the
Honda hitch (see page 265 ), or it
may be obtained separately from
your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Spare Vehicle Tire
When towing a trailer, you should
carry a full-size wheel and tire as a
spare in case you have a flat. If you
use the compact spare tire that came
with the vehicle, it may adversely
affect vehicle handling. See page
314 for information on proper tire
size, and page 345 for information on
how to store a full-size tire. When
storing a full-size spare tire in the
trailer, follow the trailer maker’s
instructions.
Additional Trailer Equipment
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page 309 ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
You may want to fill the fuel tank
with premium fuel. Premium fuel
provides improved performance.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages 262 and 264 ).
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
CONTINUED
Driving
267
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. See ‘‘Driving on
Hills’’ in the next column for
additional gear information. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher
speeds, the trailer may sway or
affect vehicle handling.
268
Driving
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller are than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Parking
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Driving
269
Main Menu
270
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page 385 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 272
Important Safety Precautions .. 273
Maintenance Schedule .................. 274
Required Maintenance Record .... 281
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 283
Fluid Locations............................... 284
Engine Oil ....................................... 285
Adding Oil................................... 285
Recommended Oil ..................... 285
Synthetic Oil ............................... 286
Additives ..................................... 287
Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 287
Cooling System .............................. 289
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 289
Replacing Engine Coolant ........ 291
Windshield Washers ..................... 294
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 295
Brake Fluid ..................................... 296
Brake System ............................. 296
Power Steering ............................... 297
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 298
Hood Latch ..................................... 300
Spark Plugs ..................................... 300
Replacement ............................... 300
Specifications ............................. 302
Battery ............................................ 303
Wiper Blades .................................. 305
Air Conditioning System ............... 307
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 308
Drive Belts ...................................... 308
Timing Belt ..................................... 309
Tires ................................................ 309
Inflation ....................................... 309
Inspection ................................... 311
Maintenance ............................... 312
Tire Rotation .............................. 312
Replacing Tires and Wheels .... 313
Wheels and Tires ....................... 314
Winter Driving ........................... 314
Snow Tires .............................. 315
Tire Chains ............................. 315
Lights .............................................. 316
Headlight Aiming ...................... 318
Replacing Bulbs ......................... 318
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 327
Maintenance
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is
the best way to protect your
investment. Proper maintenance is
essential to your safety and the
safety of your passengers. It will also
reward you with more economical,
trouble-free driving and help reduce
air pollution.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
272
Maintenance
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your vehicle is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust. Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless instructed to do so.
Maintenance
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your
vehicle serviced and what things
need attention. It is essential that
you have your vehicle serviced as
scheduled to retain its high level of
safety, dependability, and emissions
control performance.
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
vehicle as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your vehicle. The
load limit is shown on the tire
information label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
274
Maintenance
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating (see page
232 ).
Which Schedule to Follow:
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages. Select the schedule
for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of
your driving is done under one or
more of the conditions listed on that
page. Otherwise, follow the schedule
for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Maintenance
275
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service at the indicated
miles x 1,000
distance or time − whichever
km x 1,000
comes first.
months
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt#, and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed#
Replace engine coolant
15
24
12
30
45
60
75
90
105
48
72
96
120
144
168
24
36
48
60
72
84
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Adjust only if noisy
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 275 .
276
Maintenance
120
192
96
U.S. Owners
Follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if the
severe driving conditions
specified in the Severe
Conditions Maintenance
Schedule do not apply.
NOTE: If you only
OCCASIONALLY drive under a
‘‘severe’’ condition, you should
follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
Canadian Owners
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
3 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
6 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
□Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
□Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt#, and inspect water pump.
□Replace transmission fluid.
□Inspect idle speed#. □Inspect valve clearance.
□Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
□Replace engine coolant
A □Replace engine oil.
□Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 312 ).
B □Replace engine oil filter.
□Inspect front and rear brakes.
□Check parking brake adjustment.
□Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
□Inspect suspension components.
□Inspect driveshaft boots.
□Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
□Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
□Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
□Inspect exhaust system#.
□Inspect fuel lines and connections#.
C □Replace air cleaner element.
□Inspect and adjust drive belts.
□Replace dust and pollen filter.
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 275 .
NOTE:
• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
Maintenance
277
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C as required for each distance/time interval.
U.S. Owners − Refer to page 276 to determine which schedule to use.
Canadian Owners − Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service at the indicated
miles x 1,000
distance or time − whichever
km x 1,000
comes first.
months
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
− Use normal schedule except in dusty
conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt#, *1 and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed#
Replace engine coolant
15
24
12
30
60
90
45
75
105
48
96
144
72
120
168
24
48
72
36
60
84
Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
120
192
96
Adjust only if noisy
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter*2
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and conditions of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Lights and controls
Vehicle underbody
U.S. Owners
Follow the Severe Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if you
drive your vehicle MAINLY
under one or more of the
following conditions:
Driving less than 5 miles (8
km) per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less
than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot
[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long
periods of stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a
roof top carrier, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or
de-iced roads.
Canadian Owners
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
*1 : Refer to page 309 for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
*2 : Refer to page 308 for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
# : See information on maintenance and
emissions warranty, last column, page
275 .
278
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
3,750 mi/6,000 km
7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos
11,250 mi/18,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km
22,500 mi/36,000 km
26,250 mi/42,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km
37,500 mi/60,000 km
41,250 mi/66,000 km
3 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C, D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
□Replace timing belt*1, #
Do items in A, B, C, D.
Do items in A.
*1 : See timing belt on page 309 to determine need for replacement.
*2 : See dust and pollen filter on page 308 for replacement information under special driving
conditions.
A □Replace engine oil and filter.
B □Inspect front and rear brakes.
□Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 312 ).
□Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
□Inspect suspension components.
□Inspect driveshaft boots.
C □Check parking brake adjustment.
□Replace air cleaner element.
□Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches with
multipurpose grease.
□Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
□Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
□Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
□Inspect exhaust system#.
□Inspect fuel lines and connections#.
□Check all lights.
□Inspect the underbody.
D □Replace transmission fluid.
□Inspect and adjust drive belts.
□Replace dust and pollen filter.*2
#:
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 275 .
NOTE:
• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 279
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C, D as required for each distance/time interval.
U.S. Owners − Refer to page 278 to determine which schedule to use.
Canadian Owners − Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
67,500 mi/108,000 km
71,250 mi/114,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km
82,500 mi/132,000 km
86,250 mi/138,000 km
6 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km
97,500 mi/156,000 km
101,250 mi/162,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km
112,500 mi/180,000 km
116,250 mi/186,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
280
Maintenance
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Do items in A, B, C, D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt*1, #, and inspect water pump.
□Inspect valve clearance.
□Replace spark plugs.
□Inspect idle speed#.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt*1, #. Do items in A, B, C, D.
□Replace engine coolant
#:
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 275 .
*1: See timing belt on page 309 to determine need for replacement.
*2: See dust and pollen filter on page 308 for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
NOTE:
• Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
• Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 276 ) or severe
conditions (page 278 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
3,750 mi
6,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
33,750 mi
54,000 km
Date
7,500 mi
12,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
37,500 mi
60,000 km
mi/km
18,750 mi
30,000 km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
45,000 mi
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
mi/km
48,750 mi
78,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
56,250 mi
90,000 km
Date
30,000 mi
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
Date
Date
52,500 mi
84,000 km
Date
26,250 mi
42,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
22,500 mi
36,000 km
mi/km
Date
41,250 mi
66,000 km
Date
15,000 mi
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
mi/km
Date
Date
11,250 mi
18,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
60,000 mi
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
mi/km
Date
CONTINUED
Maintenance
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
63,750 mi
102,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
93,750 mi
150,000 km
Date
67,500 mi
108,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
97,500 mi
156,000 km
mi/km
78,750 mi
126,000 km
mi/km
Date
101,250 mi
162,000 km
mi/km
105,000 mi
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
mi/km
108,750 mi
174,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
112,500 mi
180,000 km
282
Maintenance
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
116,250 mi
186,000 km
Date
90,000 mi
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
Date
Date
Date
86,250 mi
138,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
82,500 mi
132,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
75,000 mi
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
mi/km
Date
Date
71,250 mi
114,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
120,000 mi
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
mi/km
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Owner Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 236 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 237 .
Windshield washer fluid − Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page 294 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
309 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page 316 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
295 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 296 .
Maintenance
283
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
284
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
Adding Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Recommended Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Genuine Honda Motor Oil is the
preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your
vehicle. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor
Oil in your vehicle for optimum
engine protection.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
285
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30
oil may be used. However, it should
be replaced with 5W-20 at the next
oil change.
Ambient Temperature
286
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
Additives
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the time and distance
(miles/kilometers) recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
2. Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
287
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
OIL FILTER
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
3. Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
4. Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
288
Maintenance
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes and check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
This coolant should always be a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze and
50 percent water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing.
If it is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any nonHonda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
289
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
RADIATOR CAP
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
290
Maintenance
RESERVE TANK
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
Replacing Engine Coolant
The cooling system should be
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2. Use of any nonHonda coolant or plain water can
result in corrosion and deposits in
the cooling system.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
DRAIN BOLT
DRAIN PLUG
1. Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial fully clockwise. Turn the
ignition off.
Open the hood. Make sure the
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
3. Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard. Loosen the drain
bolt.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
291
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
RESERVE TANK
RESERVE
TANK CAP
6. When the coolant stops draining,
tighten the drain plug at the
bottom of the radiator.
7. Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
HOLDER
4. Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt in the back of the engine
block. Loosen the drain bolt.
292
Maintenance
5. Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant, then put the
tank back in its holder.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
FILLER NECK
9. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
10.Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
11.Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Fill up to here
8. Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
The cooling system capacity is:
1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)
12.Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
13.Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
Maintenance
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel. This reservoir supplies the
windshield and rear window washers.
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the passenger’s side
headlight.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
On Canadian models
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
67 ).
294
Maintenance
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windshield washer
pump.
LEVEL GAUGE
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
To thoroughly flush the
transmission, the technician
should drain and refill it with
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive
the vehicle a short distance. Do
this three times. Then drain and
refill the transmission a final time.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
in the transmission.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
Maintenance
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake Fluid
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time and distance
recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Brake System
MAX
MIN
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
296
Maintenance
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Steering
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Maintenance
297
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Replacement
AIR
INTAKE
COVER
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
To replace it:
1. Remove the two pins holding the
air intake cover by pulling the
head on each pin. Remove the air
intake cover.
298
Maintenance
BOLTS
2. Loosen the four bolts by using a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air Cleaner Element
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
CLIP
3. Disconnect the clip from the bolt
on the air cleaner housing, then
remove the air cleaner housing
cover.
4. Remove the old air cleaner
element.
5. Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
The coolant lines inside the air
cleaner housing may be warm.
6. Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
7. Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover. Reinstall the clip on the
bolt; make sure the clip is under
the washer. Tighten the four bolts.
8. Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two pins and secure
them by pushing on the heads
until they lock.
Maintenance
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Hood Latch, Spark Plugs
Hood Latch
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Spark Plugs
The spark plugs in your vehicle are a
special platinum-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Replacement
HOLDING CLIP
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (pointed by arrows),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
300
Maintenance
1. Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
2. Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spark Plugs
HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT
3. Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
4. Use a wrench to remove the
hexagon socket head cap bolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
6. Put the new spark plug into the
socket; then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
5. Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
301
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spark Plugs
Specifications:
Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
8. Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
9. Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
7. Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
302
Maintenance
10.Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
11.Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
NGK:
DENSO:
PZFR5F-11
PKJ16CR-L11
Spark Plug Gap:
0.04 in (1.1 mm) +−00.1 mm
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Battery
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
If the terminals are severely corroded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative (−) cable first and reconnect it last. Clean the battery terminals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Battery
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicle’s
electrical system.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
304
Maintenance
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio you will
see ‘‘
’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
188 ).
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead while the
sliding doors are open, the power
sliding door system needs to be
resynchronized (see page 96 ).
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
vehicle’s electronic controls. Detach
the battery cables bef ore connecting
the battery to a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
To replace a wiper blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Front windshield: Raise the driver’s
side first, then the passenger’s
side.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold it in while you
push the blade assembly toward
the base of the arm.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
305
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
BLADE
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
306
Maintenance
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
Front windshield: Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air Conditioning System
Your vehicle’s air conditioning is a
sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging, should be
done by a qualified mechanic. You
can do a couple of things to make
sure the air conditioning works
efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
370 .)
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
Maintenance
307
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual. Have the dust and pollen filter
replaced by your Honda dealer.
308
Maintenance
Drive Belts
POWER STEERING BELT
The belt should have the following
‘‘play’’ or deflection.
Power steering belt:
0.51−0.65 in (13.0−16.5 mm)
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
ALTERNATOR BELT
Check the condition of the two drive
belts (power steering belt and
alternator belt). Examine the edges
of each belt for cracks or fraying.
Check the tension of the power
steering belt by pushing on it with
your thumb midway between the
pulleys.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Timing Belt, Tires
Timing Belt
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated. The
following pages give more detailed
information on how and when to
check air pressure, how to inspect
your tires for damage and wear, and
what to do when your tires need to
be replaced.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are more
prone to damage from road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
309
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
the same time you check all the
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the
vehicle before checking the tire
pressure, the tires can still be
considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
310
Maintenance
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the vehicle has been
driven several miles), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Tire Size
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
225/60R16 98T
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5
kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
These pressures are also given on
the tire information label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Your vehicle’s tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Maintenance
311
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
312
Maintenance
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your vehicle’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
On some models
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-toback.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
The tires that came with your
vehicle were selected to match the
performance capabilities of the
vehicle while providing the best
combination of handling, ride
comfort, and long life. You should
replace them with radial tires of the
same size, load range, speed rating,
and maximum cold tire pressure
rating (as shown on the tire’s
sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
tires on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
accuracy.
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
313
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle. Replacement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
314
Maintenance
Wheels and Tires
Wheel:
16 x 6 1/2 JJ
Tire:
225/60R16 98T
See page 372 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
Winter Driving
Tires that are marked ‘‘M+ S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels to balance
your vehicle’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
are clear. Check with the tire dealer
for maximum speed recommendations.
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
you hear them coming in contact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension.
Remove them as soon as you begin
Maintenance
315
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Check the operation of your vehicle’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicle’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
316
Maintenance
HEADLIGHT
TURN SIGNAL/
SIDE MARKER/
PARKING LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Check the following:
STOP/TAILLIGHTS/
SIDE MARKER LIGHTS
TAILLIGHT
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 371 to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
Maintenance
317
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs, one on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
base and protect the glass from
contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
1. Open the hood.
If you need to change the headlight bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the air intake cover (see
page 298 ).
318
Maintenance
HOLD-DOWN WIRE
BULB
WEATHER
SEAL
CONNECTOR
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
3. Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
4. Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place and clip the end into
the slot.
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal and Parking Light
Bulb
6. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
7. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
8. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover.
HOLDING CLIP
1. If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
319
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
4. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Fenders)
5. Remove the burned out bulb from
the socket by pushing it in and
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks.
6. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
9. Put the inner fender in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the center.
320
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Release the
covers by inserting a flat-tip
screwdriver into the slot until the
cover bows slightly. Then pivot
the screwdriver 90° and pull it
straight out of the slot.
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
3. Pull the taillight assembly out of
the body by sliding it backward.
4. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight/side
marker light or turn signal light.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Tailgate)
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
9. When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Tighten the two
mounting screws and reinstall the
covers in place.
TAILLIGHT COVER
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the taillight cover.
Remove it by carefully prying in
the notch on its edge with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver.
2. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: taillight or back-up
light.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
321
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
5. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
6. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the taillight cover.
SCREW
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment on the passenger’s
side. Remove that lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a
small flat-tipped screwdriver.
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw under the lens.
322
Maintenance
3. Pull the light assembly out of the
tailgate.
4. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
6. Put the socket back into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
7. Test the light to make sure the
new bulb is working.
8. Put the light assembly back into
the tailgate. Install the screw and
tighten it securely. Reinstall the
lens segment.
1. Remove the license light assembly
by carefully prying on the left
edge of the lens with a flat-tip
screwdriver and pulling the
assembly out.
2. Remove the lens from the bulb
holder by pulling the lens while
squeezing the tabs on both sides
of the holder.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
323
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
4. Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
5. Put the lens back on the bulb
holder and push it until it latches.
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Lights
The individual map lights, cargo area
light, and the vanity mirror lights
come apart the same way. They do
not all use the same bulb.
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
6. Slide the left side of the light
assembly into the hole. Push on
the right side to latch the
assembly into place.
1. Remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
324
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Front individual map light:
Pry on the front edge in front of both
map lights.
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Rear individual map light:
Pry on the middle edge of the lens
near the vent.
Cargo area light:
Pry on the rear edge to the left and
right of center.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
3. Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
325
Main Menu
Lights
SUN VISOR
326
Maintenance
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Storing Your Vehicle
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page 287 ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Nonporous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
a month).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
If you store your vehicle for 12
months or longer, have your Honda
dealer perform the inspections called
for in the 24 months/30,000 miles
(48,000 km) maintenance schedule
(Normal Conditions) as soon as you
take it out of storage (see page 276 ).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.
Maintenance
327
Main Menu
328
Main Menu
Appearance Care
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your vehicle and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
Exterior Care.................................. 330
Washing ...................................... 330
Waxing ........................................ 331
Aluminum Wheels ..................... 331
Paint Touch-up ........................... 331
Interior Care ................................... 332
Carpeting .................................... 332
Floor mats................................... 332
Fabric .......................................... 333
Vinyl ............................................ 333
Leather ........................................ 333
Seat Belts .................................... 333
Windows ..................................... 334
Air Fresheners ........................... 334
Corrosion Protection ..................... 335
Body Repairs .................................. 336
Appearance Care
329
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Exterior Care
Washing
Frequent washing helps preserve
your vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and grit
can scratch the paint, while tree sap
and bird droppings can permanently
ruin the finish.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area,
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is
parked in the sun, move it into the
shade and let the exterior cool down
before you start.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommended in this Owner’s
Manual.
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
330
Appearance Care
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
cool water to remove loose dirt.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Wash the vehicle using the water
and detergent solution and a softbristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to rewax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page 331 ).
The radio antenna on your vehicle does
not need to be removed when you use a
‘‘drive-through’’car wash. However, if
you remove the antenna, make sure to
reinstall it and tighten it securely using
an appropriate tool.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Exterior Care
Waxing
Always wash and dry the whole
vehicle before waxing it. You should
wax your vehicle, including the metal
trim, whenever water sits on the
surface in large patches. It should
form into beads or droplets after
waxing.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes − A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
Polishes − Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.
Aluminum Wheels
On some models
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior. Wash them with the same
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
Paint Touch-up
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for
chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
The wheels have a protective clearcoat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Appearance Care
331
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Carpeting
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
Floor Mats
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
The genuine Honda driver’s floor
mat was designed to hook over the
floor mat anchor. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your vehicle.
332
Appearance Care
If you replace it, use a genuine
Honda floor mat that is designed to
be used with the floor mat anchor in
your vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Fabric
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Vinyl
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Leather
Seat Belts
On EX-L model
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and
buff as described above.
LOOP
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Appearance Care
333
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Windows
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
The rear window def ogger wires are
bonded to the inside of the glass.
Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
dislodge and break the def ogger wires.
When cleaning the rear window, use
gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.
334
Appearance Care
Air Fresheners
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolor.
If you use a liquid air freshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Corrosion Protection
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your vehicle:
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirt and road salt that collects in
hollows on the underside of the
vehicle stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
2. Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the vehicle.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your vehicle from
corroding by performing some
simple periodic maintenance:
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your vehicle. This
is especially important in areas
that use road salt in winter. It is
also a good idea in humid climates
and areas subject to salt air. Be
careful of the ABS wheel sensors
and wiring at each wheel.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Appearance Care
335
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Body Repairs
Body repairs can affect your vehicle’s
resistance to corrosion. If your
vehicle needs repairs after a collision,
pay close attention to the parts used
in the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Honda replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Honda body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same highquality appearance.
336
Appearance Care
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Honda parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investigate this before any repairs have
begun.
Take your vehicle to your authorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosionpreventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the morecommon problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 338
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 339
If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 348
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
Very Slowly......................... 348
The Starter Operates
Normally ................................. 348
Jump Starting ................................. 349
If Your Engine Overheats............. 351
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 354
Charging System Indicator........... 355
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 356
Readiness Codes ........................ 357
Brake System Indicator ................ 358
Fuses ............................................... 359
Checking and Replacing ........... 360
Emergency Towing ....................... 365
Taking Care of the Unexpected
337
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle has a compact spare
tire that takes up less space. Use this
spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road surfaces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
338
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your vehicle. Do not use your
spare tire on another vehicle
unless it is the same make and
model.
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page 257 ). Driving
with the compact spare tire may
activate the TCS.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
The compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
get to an exit or an area to stop that
is far away from the traffic lanes.
JACK
VINYL BAG
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOLS
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park. Apply the parking brake.
SPARE TIRE
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
339
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
7. The spare tire is stored under the
floor between the first and second
row of seats. If the front seats are
adjusted to the rear-most position,
move the seats forward slightly
and adjust the seat-backs to an
upright position (see page 99 ).
Lift up the center table (see page
118 ).
COVER
3. Open the tailgate.
Remove the cargo net.
5. Take the tools out of the storage
compartment.
4. The tools and jack are behind a
cover in the cargo area on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
turning the handle
counterclockwise, then pulling out
the cover.
6. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
340
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
SPARE TIRE
BASKET
WHEEL NUTS
HOOK
HANDLE
SPARE TIRE
8. Open either of the rear sliding
doors. Pull the floor carpet up by
lifting up on the edge, then raise
the floor lid by pulling up on the
handle. To keep the floor carpet
and lid out of the way, pull out the
hook on the back of the floor lid
and attach it into the seat-back
handle on the driver’s seat.
WING BOLT
9. On EX and EX-L models
Remove the spare tire basket.
10.Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well. After
you have removed the spare tire,
screw this wing bolt back into
place.
11.On EX and EX-L models
If you are changing a rear tire,
close the sliding door. Then turn
off the sliding door MAIN switch.
12.Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
341
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
JACKING POINT
13. Locate the jacking point nearest
the tire you need to change. It is
pointed to by a △ mark molded
into the underside of the body.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
342
Taking Care of the Unexpected
WHEEL
WRENCH
14. Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
15.Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Temporarily place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
You could scratch the wheel if you
put it face down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL
COVER
BRAKE HUB
On LX model
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
16.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully, it may be hot from
driving.
17.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
343
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
18.Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
344
Taking Care of the Unexpected
19.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
20.Put the flat tire in the supplied
vinyl bag. This bag is stored in the
rear compartment on the driver’s
side panel in the third row. Knot
the top of the vinyl bag.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
21. Storing the flat tire behind the third
seat
BRACKET
MOUNTING
BOLT
WING BOLT
When the third seat is not folded,
the flat tire is secured behind the
third seat.
On EX and EX-L models
Turn on the sliding door MAIN
switch so you can open the door.
BRACKET
BRACKET MOUNTING BOLT
Remove the bracket and the wing
bolt from the spare tire lid by
unscrewing the bracket mounting
bolt.
BRACKET
PLASTIC
SCREW
22.You will find a u-shaped slit on the
carpet behind the seat bottom of
the third seat. Pull up the carpet at
the slit and remove the plastic
screw with a coin.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
345
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
Adjust the seat-back of the third
seat to the upright position (see
page 100 ). Install the bracket and
the bracket mounting bolt to the
attachment point as shown, and
tighten the bolt. Make sure the
bracket is securely locked.
BRACKET
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
Install the flat tire on the bracket
with the inside of the wheel facing
toward you. Put the tire mounting
wing bolt in the attachment point
through one of the five wheel nut
holes and the bracket as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the wing
bolt.
346
Taking Care of the Unexpected
23. Storing the Flat Tire on the Floor
When the third seat is folded, the
flat tire is secured to the floor on
top of the folded seat. Pull up the
carpet on the attachment point and
remove the plastic screw as
described in the previous
procedure.
Remove the wing bolt from the
bracket that is attached to the
spare tire lid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
24. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket clockwise to
lock it in place. Store the tools.
Replace the cover.
25. Close the tailgate.
26. Store the plastic screw in the spare
tire well.
On LX model
ATTACHMENT POINT
Place the flat tire face down on the
attachment point. Put the tire
mounting wing bolt in the
attachment point through one of
the five wheel nut holes as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the wing
bolt.
Store the wheel cover in the spare
tire well. Make sure it will not get
scratched or damaged.
On EX and EX-L models
Store the spare tire basket in the
spare tire well.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
27.Unclip the hook from the seat
back handle on the driver’s seat
and lower the floor lid and the
carpet.
Make sure to adjust the front
seats properly before you start
driving (see page 99 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
347
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
348
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or Neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 349 .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
Emergency Towing on page 365 .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 303 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
349 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 247 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Your vehicle has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page 80 ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 360 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 365 .
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run
down, you may be able to start the
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start a Honda by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your vehicle, follow
these directions closely:
1. Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page 303 ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
349
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
BOOSTER
BATTERY
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
350
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metalto-metal contact.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
If Your Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
It may go higher if you are driving up
a long steep hill on a very hot day. If
it climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Your vehicle can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
351
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Overheats
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling/
climate control system and all
other accessories. Turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint then continue driving.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
352
Taking Care of the Unexpected
6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 365 ).
7. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
237 ). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Overheats
8. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
9. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
10.Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
11.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See Emergency
Towing on page 365 .)
12.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
353
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
354
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood and check the oil
level (see page 236 ). Although oil
level and oil pressure are not
directly connected, an engine that
is very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 285 ).
4. Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See Emergency
Towing on page 365 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Charging System Indicator
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, heater, A/C,
climate control, rear defogger, cruise
control, etc. Try not to use other
electrically-operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running and take extra care not to
stall it. Starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
355
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your vehicle to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
356
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
driving trips.
If the indicator remains on past three
driving trips, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
You should also have the dealer
inspect your vehicle if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your car for a
state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. To check if
they are set, turn the ignition ON (II),
but do not start the engine. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. See State
Emissions Testing on pages 379 and
380 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
357
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake System Indicator
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
*
U.S. indicator shown
The Brake System Indicator
normally comes on when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
358
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicle’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page 296 ). If the
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to
your dealer and have the brake
system inspected for leaks or worn
brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the
vehicle begins to slow down, and you
will have to press harder on the
pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See Emergency
Towing on page 265 .)
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If the ABS indicator and the TCS
indicator come on with this indicator,
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
All the electrical circuits in your
vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in three fuse
boxes.
DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR
The interior fuse boxes are located
underneath the dashboard on each
side.
PASSENGER’S SIDE
INTERIOR
To open the fuse box on the
passenger’s side, pull the right edge
of the cover.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
359
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD
The primary under-hood fuse box is
located in the back of the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side.
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
UNDER-HOOD
The secondary fuse boxes are in the
engine compartment next to the
battery.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
363 and 364 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid (the diagram for the
driver’s side interior fuse box is on
the kick panel below the fuse box),
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check the component’s operation.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
360
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.
FUSE PULLER
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
5. Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
361
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
362
Taking Care of the Unexpected
On EX and EX-L models
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘
’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
188 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SECONDARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE
BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
30 A
40 A
20 A
30 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
−
20 A
15 A
20 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
Circuits Protected
Power Sliding Door*
Rear A/C
* : EX and EX-L models
Circuits Protected
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Right Headlight
ACG S
Hazard
Not Used
Stop
Left Headlight
ABS F/S
Power Window Motor
Power Sliding Door*
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
SECONDARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE
BOX
No. Amps.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
40 A
40 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
120 A
30 A
7.5 A
50 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
Power Seat*
Heater Motor
Cooling Fan
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Battery
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
Ignition Switch (IG 1 Main)
ABS Motor
* : EX and EX-L models
No. Amps.
1
2
20 A
20 A
Circuits Protected
Seat Heaters*
Rear Entertaiment system*
* : EX-L model
Taking Care of the Unexpected
363
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
Front
1
2
3
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
10
11
12
13
7.5 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
Fuel Pump
SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Power Mirror
Daytime Running Light*
ECU (PCM), Cruise Control
IG Coil
ACC Relay
Back-up Lights, Instrument
Lights
Turn Signals
Rear Wiper
Front Wiper
Starter Signal
* : On Canadian models
No. Amps.
Front
1
20 A
2
3
4
5
20 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
6
7
8
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
9
10
15 A
15 A
11
12
13
14
15
16
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Driver’s Side Automatic
Sliding Door
Power Seat Reclining*1
BSC*1
Power Seat Sliding*1
Passenger’s Side Automatic
Sliding Door
Daytime Running Light*2
Left Rear Window
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
ACC Socket
Inst. Panel Light, License
Light
Interior Light, Radio
Power Door Locks
Clock, Back Up
ABS Motor Check
Driver’s Power Window
Right Rear Window
*1 : EX and EX-L models
*2 : Canadian models
364
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or,
if you belong to one, an organization
that provides roadside assistance.
Never tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle with just a rope or
chain. It is very dangerous.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to transport your Honda.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground. This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Honda.
Sling-type Equipment − The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the vehicle
off the ground. Your vehicle’s suspension and body can be seriously
damaged. This method of towing
is unacceptable.
If your Honda cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following.
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the
ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
365
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If you decide to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
make sure you use a properlydesigned and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
described above, and leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I) so
the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
run down the battery.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
366
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 368
Specifications ................................. 370
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 372
Treadwear .................................. 372
Traction....................................... 372
Temperature .............................. 373
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 374
Driving in Foreign Countries ....... 375
Emissions Controls........................ 376
The Clean Air Act ...................... 376
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 376
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 376
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 376
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 377
PGM-FI System ..................... 377
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 377
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 377
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 377
Replacement Parts..................... 377
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 378
State Emissions Testing ............... 379
Technical Information
367
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
368
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
ENGINE NUMBER
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Technical Information
369
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
201.2 in (5,110 mm)
75.6 in (1,920 mm)
68.5 in (1,740 mm)*1
69.7 in (1,770 mm)*2
118.1 in (3,000 mm)
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
*1 : LX
*2 : EX, EX-L
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
370
Technical Information
See the tire information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
8,265 lbs (3,750 kg)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
32−34 oz (850−900 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
*1
Change
Total
Change*2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
washer
Canada Vehicles
reservoir
Approx.
20.00 US gal (75.7 , 16.65 Imp gal)
1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)
2.48 US gal (9.4 , 2.07 Imp gal)
4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)
4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)
5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)
3.5 US qt (3.3 , 2.9 Imp qt)
8.3 US qt (7.9 , 7.0 Imp qt)
2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)
4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications
Lights
Headlights
High/Low
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights/Rear side
marker lights
Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
High-mount brake light
Individual map lights
Front
Rear
Cargo area light
Vanity mirror lights
Battery
Capacity
12 V − 60/55 W (HB2)
12 V − 24/2.2 CP
12 V − 21 W (Amber)
12 V − 21/5 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
2 CP
21 W
3 CP
21 CP (18 W)
4 CP
10 W
8W
1.8 W
12 V − 52 AH/5 HR
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Tires
Size
Pressure
Fuses
Interior
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
Under-hood
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
6-cylinder, gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10 : 1
See spark plug maintenance section page 302 .
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0°
−0°30’
2°07’
225/60R16 98T
T135/80D16 101M
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
See page 364 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 364 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 363 or the fuse box
cover.
Technical Information
371
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according
to Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
372
Technical Information
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Technical Information
373
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oxygenated Fuels
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
information to be posted on the
pump.
374
Technical Information
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
METHANOL (methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Foreign Countries
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect performance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the replacement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Technical Information
375
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
276 .
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase Ventilation valve routes them
376
Technical Information
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lower quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Technical Information
377
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Keep the engine tuned-up.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it.
Park your vehicle away from high
grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
378
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission). Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (approximately 3 minutes).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
Technical Information
379
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T). Do not use the cruise
control. When traffic allows, drive
for 90 seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
380
Technical Information
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Relations
Information ................................. 382
Warranty Coverages ..................... 383
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 384
Authorized Manuals ...................... 385
Warranty and Customer Relations
381
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Relations Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Consumer Affairs Department
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
(787) 250-4318
Tel: (800) 999-1009
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Canadian Owners:
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
382
Warranty and Customer Relations
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 368 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2002 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2002 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
Warranty and Customer Relations
383
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
384
Warranty and Customer Relations
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61S0X03
Form Description
Price
Each*
$68.00
1999-2002 Honda Odyssey
Service Manual
$48.00
1999-2002 Honda Odyssey
61S0X03EL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
$42.00
1999-2002 Honda Odyssey
61S0X30
Body Repair Manual
$32.00
2002 Honda Odyssey
31S0X630
Owner’s Manual
$27.00
2002 Honda Odyssey
31S0X730
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
FREE
Order Form for Previous YearsHON-R
Indicate Year and Model Desired
*
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
2
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
H
O
N
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.00
GRAND TOTAL
385
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
386
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Main Menu
Index
A
Accessories and Modifications .... 239
Accessories................................. 239
Additional Safety Precaution.... 240
Modifications ............................. 240
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 82
Accessory Power Sockets............. 126
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 287
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 53
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 298
Air Conditioning System....... 132, 140
Maintenance ............................... 307
Rear A/C Control ...................... 154
Usage .................................. 132, 140
Air Outlets (Vents) ................ 134, 140
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 309
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 374
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning........ 331
Antifreeze ....................................... 289
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 65, 256
Operation .................................... 255
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 188
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81
Appearance Care ........................... 329
Armrests ......................................... 104
Audio Controls, Remote................ 187
Audio System ................. 157, 169, 189
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 51
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 73
Automatic Speed Control.............. 222
Automatic Transmission............... 248
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 370
Checking Fluid Level ................ 295
Shifting ........................................ 249
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 248
Shift Lever Positions ................. 249
Shift Lock Release ..................... 251
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 64, 355
Jump Starting ............................. 349
Maintenance ............................... 303
Specifications ............................. 371
Before Driving ............................... 231
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 49
Beverage Holder ............................ 120
Body Repair .................................... 336
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 255
Break-in, New Linings .............. 232
Bulb Replacement ..................... 320
Fluid ............................................ 296
Parking ........................................ 117
System Indicator .................. 64, 358
Wear Indicators ......................... 254
Braking System.............................. 254
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 232
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 73
Brights, Headlights ......................... 72
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 321
Brake Lights............................... 320
Cargo Area Light ....................... 325
Front Parking Lights ................. 319
Front Side Marker Lights......... 319
Headlights .................................. 318
High-mount Brake Light .......... 322
Individual Map Lights ............... 324
License Plate Light .................... 323
CONTINUED
I
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement
Rear Bulbs .......................... 320, 321
Specifications ............................. 371
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 319
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 318
C
Cancel Button................................. 224
Capacities Chart............................. 370
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 59
Cargo Area Light ........................... 129
Cargo Hooks .................................. 244
Cargo Net ....................................... 244
Carrying Cargo .............................. 241
Cassette Player
Care ............................................. 186
Operation .................... 162, 183, 197
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
CD Changer ................... 165, 179, 202
CD Player ....................... 165, 177, 200
Center Pocket ................................ 124
Center Table................................... 118
Certification Label ......................... 368
Chains ............................................. 315
II
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 287
When to....................................... 276
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 339
Changing Engine Coolant ............. 291
Charging System Indicator .... 64, 355
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 246
Childproof Door Locks ................... 88
Child Safety ...................................... 22
Child Seat .......................................... 28
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 45
Cleaner Element, Air ..................... 298
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ..................... 331
Carpeting .................................... 332
Exterior ....................................... 330
Fabric .......................................... 333
Interior ........................................ 332
Seat Belts .................................... 333
Vinyl ............................................ 333
Windows ..................................... 334
Climate Control System ................ 140
Clock, Setting the .......................... 118
Coat Hook ....................................... 125
Code, Audio System ...................... 188
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 376
Coin Holder .................................... 124
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 247
Compact Spare ............................... 338
Consumer Information*................ 382
Controls, Instruments and .............. 61
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 289
Checking ..................................... 237
Proper Solution .......................... 289
Replacing .................................... 291
Temperature Gauge .................... 69
Corrosion Protection ..................... 335
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 376
Cruise Control Operation ............. 222
Customer Relations Office ........... 382
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Dashboard .................................... 2, 62
Daytime Running Lights................. 73
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 384
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77
Defrosting the Windows....... 137, 147
Dimensions ..................................... 370
Main Menu
Index
Dimming the Headlights ................ 72
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 295
Engine Oil ................................... 236
Directional Signals ........................... 74
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 254
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 288
Doors
Locking and Unlocking ............... 82
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83
Manual Sliding Doors.................. 91
Monitor Light ............................... 66
Power Door Locks ....................... 82
Power Sliding Doors.................... 92
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 372
Drive Belts ...................................... 308
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 245
Economy ..................................... 238
In Bad Weather .......................... 260
In Foreign Countries ................. 375
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 298
DVD Player .................................... 205
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 238
Emergencies on the Road............. 337
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 349
Emergencies on the Road
Brake System Indicator ............ 358
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 339
Charging System Indicator ...... 355
Checking the Fuses................... 359
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 354
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 356
Overheated Engine ................... 351
Emergency Brake .......................... 117
Emergency Flashers ....................... 77
Emergency Towing ....................... 365
Emissions Controls........................ 376
Emissions Testing, State .............. 379
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 69
Drive Belts .................................. 308
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 64, 356
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 64, 354
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 285
Overheating................................ 351
Specifications ............................. 371
Starting........................................ 247
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 374
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 376
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 59
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 377
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 20
Exterior, Cleaning the ................... 330
F
Fabric, Cleaning ............................. 333
Fan, Interior ........................... 132, 145
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 131
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 233
Filters
Air ................................................ 298
Dust and Pollen .......................... 308
Oil ................................................ 287
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 77
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 339
CONTINUED
III
Main Menu
Index
Floor Mat ........................................ 332
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 295
Brake ........................................... 296
Power Steering........................... 297
Fluids
Windshield Washer ................... 294
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................... 158, 170, 191
Folding the Third Seat .................. 109
Foreign Countries, Driving in ...... 375
Four-way Flashers ........................... 77
Fuel .................................................. 232
Fill Door and Cap....................... 233
Gauge ............................................ 69
Octane Requirement ................. 232
Oxygenated ................................ 375
Reserve Indicator......................... 67
Tank, Filling the......................... 233
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 360
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 238
Gasohol ........................................... 374
IV
Gasoline .......................................... 232
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 67
Gauge ............................................ 69
Octane Requirement ................. 232
Tank, Filling the......................... 233
Gas Station Procedures................. 233
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 69
Fuel ................................................ 69
Speedometer ................................ 68
Tachometer .................................. 68
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 264
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 264
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 249
Glass Cleaning ............................... 334
Glove Box ......................................... 90
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 264
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 318
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 77
Headlights......................................... 72
Aiming ......................................... 318
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 73
Daytime Running Lights............. 73
High Beam Indicator ................... 67
Reminder Chime .......................... 72
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 318
Turning on .................................... 72
Headphones.................................... 219
Head Restraints ............................. 104
Heated Mirror ................................ 117
Heating and Cooling ...................... 132
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 247
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 72
HomeLink Universal
Transmitter ................................ 225
Hood Latch ..................................... 300
Hood, Opening the ........................ 234
Horn................................................... 71
Hydroplaning.................................. 261
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 368
Ignition
Keys............................................... 79
Main Menu
Index
Switch ............................................ 81
Timing Control System ............. 377
Immobilizer System......................... 80
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 63
Individual Map Lights ................... 129
Infant Restraint ................................ 32
Infant Seats ....................................... 28
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 45
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 309
Inside Mirror .................................. 116
Inspection, Tire .............................. 311
Instrument Panel ......................... 2, 62
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 73
Interior Cleaning ............................ 332
Interior Lights ................................ 127
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 342
Jack, Tire ........................................ 340
Jump Starting ................................. 349
K
Keys ................................................... 79
L
Label, Certification ........................ 368
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 74
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 15, 49
LATCH .............................................. 47
Light Control Switch ..................... 127
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 318
Indicator ........................................ 63
Interior ........................................ 127
Parking .......................................... 72
Turn Signal ................................... 74
Load Limits............................. 242, 262
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 233
Glove Box ..................................... 90
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83
Power Door .................................. 82
Sliding Doors ................................ 92
Tailgate ......................................... 88
Low Coolant Level ......................... 237
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 67
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 64, 354
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 370
Luggage .......................................... 241
M
Maintenance ................................... 271
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 283
Record .................................. 281-282
Required Indicator ....................... 70
Safety........................................... 272
Schedule .............................. 274-280
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 64, 356
Manual Sliding Doors...................... 91
Meters, Gauges ................................ 68
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 374
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 116
Moving the Second Row Bucket
Seat .............................................. 106
CONTINUED
V
Main Menu
Index
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 250
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 232
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 368
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 232
Odometer .......................................... 68
Odometer, Trip ................................ 69
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 287
Change, When to ....................... 276
Checking Engine ....................... 236
Pressure Indicator ............... 64, 354
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 286
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 82
Operation in Foreign Countries ... 375
Outside Mirrors ............................. 116
Overheating, Engine ..................... 351
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 283
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 374
VI
P
Paint Touch-up ............................... 331
Panel Brightness Control ............... 73
Park Gear Position......................... 249
Parking ............................................ 253
Parking Brake ................................ 117
Parking Lights.................................. 72
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 253
PGM-FI System.............................. 377
Polishing and Waxing ................... 331
Power Sliding Doors
Indicator .................................. 66, 97
Operation ...................................... 92
Switches ........................................ 93
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ............. 11
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 20
Protecting Adults ............................. 12
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20
Protecting Children ......................... 22
Protecting Infants ........................ 32
Protecting Larger Children ........ 41
Protecting Small Children .......... 37
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 45
Using LATCH .............................. 47
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 351
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 169
Readiness Codes ............................ 357
Rear A/C Unit ................................ 154
Rear Compartment ........................ 124
Rear Entertainment System ......... 205
Rear Lights, Bulb
Replacement ....................... 320, 321
Rear View Mirror........................... 116
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Rear Windows ................................ 115
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 76
Reclining the Seat Backs ...... 100, 103
Reclining the Second Seats .......... 100
Reclining the Third Seat ............... 100
Reminder Lights .............................. 63
Remote Audio Controls................. 187
Remote Control .............................. 211
Remote Transmitter ........................ 84
Removing the Second
Seats ............................................ 108
Main Menu
Index
Replacement Information
Air Cleaner Element .................. 298
Coolant ........................................ 291
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 287
Fuses ........................................... 360
Light Bulbs ................................. 318
Schedule ..................................... 274
Spark Plugs................................. 300
Timing Belt ................................. 309
Tires ............................................ 313
Wiper Blades .............................. 305
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 52
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 237
Reverse Gear Position................... 250
Rotation, Tire ................................. 312
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 49
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 384
Safety Features .................................. 7
Air bags ........................................... 9
Door Locks ................................... 10
Head Restraints ........................... 10
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 10
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 60
Safety Messages ................................ ii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 49
Additional Information ................ 49
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 51
Cleaning ...................................... 333
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 49
Maintenance ................................. 52
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 49, 64
System Components.................... 49
Use During Pregnancy................ 20
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Seat Heaters ................................... 112
Seats .................................................. 98
Adjustments ................................. 99
Drivers Lumbar Support ........... 103
Folding the Third Seat .............. 109
Head Restraints ......................... 104
Manual Height Adjustment ...... 101
Passenger Seating ....................... 98
Reclining the Second Seat ........ 100
Reclining the Third Seat ........... 100
Removing the Second Seats ..... 108
Third Seat Access ...................... 105
Security System ............................. 221
Serial Number ................................ 368
Service Intervals ............................ 276
Service Manual* ............................ 385
Service Station Procedures .......... 233
Setting the Clock ........................... 118
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 248
Shift Lock Release ......................... 251
Side Airbags ..................................... 55
How The Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Works ....................... 56
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 55
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 319
Signaling Turns ................................ 74
Sliding Doors .................................... 91
Snow Tires ...................................... 315
Solvent-type Cleaners .................... 330
Sound System................. 157, 169, 189
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 338
Specifications ............................. 371
Spark Plugs ..................................... 300
CONTINUED
VII
Main Menu
Index
Specifications Charts..................... 370
Speed Control ................................. 222
Speedometer .................................... 68
SRS, Additional Information........... 53
Additional Safety Precautions .... 58
How the Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners Work ..................... 51
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 55
How Your Airbags Work ............ 53
SRS Components ......................... 53
SRS Service................................... 58
SRS Indicator.............................. 55, 65
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 82
Starting the Engine........................ 247
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 247
With a Dead Battery ................. 349
State Emissions Testing ............... 379
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 351
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 78
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81
Stereo Sound System .... 157, 169, 189
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 327
Storage Box .................................... 125
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 122
VIII
Sun Visor......................................... 123
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 58
SRS Indicator.......................... 55, 65
System Components.................... 53
Synthetic Oil ................................... 286
T
Tachometer ...................................... 68
Tailgate ............................................. 88
Opening the .................................. 88
Open Monitor Light .................... 66
Taillights, Changing Bulbs
in .......................................... 320, 321
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 337
Tape Player .................... 162, 183, 197
Technical Descriptions
Emissions Control Systems ...... 376
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 374
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 378
Temperature Gauge ........................ 69
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 51
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 45
Theft Protection............................. 188
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 378
Time, Setting the ........................... 118
Timing Belt ..................................... 309
Tire Chains ..................................... 315
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 339
Tires ................................................ 309
Air Pressure ............................... 309
Balancing .................................... 312
Checking Wear .......................... 311
Compact Spare ........................... 338
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 372
Inflation ....................................... 309
Inspection ................................... 311
Replacing .................................... 313
Rotating....................................... 312
Snow ............................................ 315
Specifications ............................. 371
Tire Chains ................................. 315
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 262
Emergency Wrecker ................. 365
Traction Control System (TCS)... 257
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 295
Fluid Selection............................ 295
Identification Number ............... 368
Main Menu
Index
Shifting the Automatic .............. 249
Treadwear ...................................... 372
Trip Meter ........................................ 69
Turn Signals ..................................... 74
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 340
U
Underside, Cleaning ...................... 335
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 337
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 372
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 232
Upholstery Cleaning...................... 332
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 288
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 123
Vehicle Capacity Load .......... 242, 262
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 370
Vehicle Identification Number..... 368
Vehicle Storage .............................. 327
Ventilation .............................. 135, 140
VIN .................................................. 368
Vinyl Cleaning ................................ 333
Viscosity, Oil................................... 285
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 60
Warranty Coverages* ................... 383
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 294
Level Indicator ............................. 67
Operation ...................................... 76
Washing .......................................... 330
Waxing and Polishing ................... 331
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Alignment and Balance ............. 312
Compact Spare ........................... 338
Wrench ....................................... 342
Windows
Cleaning ...................................... 334
Operating the Power ................. 113
Rear ............................................. 115
Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 74
Defroster ............................ 137, 147
Washers ........................................ 76
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 305
Operation ...................................... 74
Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer ...................................... 76
Wireless Headphones ................... 219
Worn Tires ..................................... 311
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 365
*
: U.S. and Canada only
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
20.00 US gal (75.7 , 16.65 Imp gal)
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 285 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
295 ).
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 297 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 296 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project